navigation system: basic functions section 1 · navigation system: basic functions 30 when the...

SECTION 1

NAVIGATION SYSTEM: BASIC FUNCTIONS

29


Basic information before operation

� Initial screen 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to use the Remote Touch 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Inputting letters and numbers/List screen operation 33. . . . . . . . .

� Screen adjustment 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Help icon 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Map screen operation 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current position display 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen scroll operation 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the screens 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map scale 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot print map 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orientation of the map 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard map icons 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Speech command system 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Natural speech information 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command list 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


30

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switchis in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode, the initial screen will be displayedand the system will begin operating.

CAUTIONWhen the vehicle is stopped with theengine running, always apply theparking brake for safety.

After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”screen will be displayed.

After about 5 seconds, the “CAUTION”screen automatically switches to the mapscreen. When selecting “Show Map” orpushing the “MAP/VOICE” button, themap screen is displayed.

Initial screen


31

� Maintenance informationThis system informs about when to replacecertain parts or components and showsdealer information (if registered) on thescreen.

When the vehicle reaches a previously setdriving distance or date specified for ascheduled maintenance check, the “Infor-mation” screen will be displayed when thenavigation system is in operation.

To disable this screen, select “Do NotDisplay This Message Again”. Thisscreen goes off if the screen is not op-erated for several seconds.To prevent this information screen from be-ing displayed again, select “Do NotDisplay This Message Again”.

To register “Maintenance information”, see“—Maintenance” on page 384.

This navigation system can be operated bythe Remote Touch when the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch is in the ACCESSO-RY or IGNITION ON mode.

A pointer is shown on the screen. Use theRemote Touch knob to move the pointerand select the buttons on the screen.

To select a button on the screen, place thepointer on top of the button and then pushthe “ENTER” button on the RemoteTouch. Once a button has been selected,the screen will change.

When the pointer moves close to a button,it will be automatically pulled onto that but-ton. The strength of this pull can be ad-justed. (See page 321.)

The pointer will disappear from the screenif it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operationof the Remote Touch knob will cause thepointer to reappear.

How to use the RemoteTouch


32

Pointer shape can be changed. (See page321.)

: Change to an arrow.

: Change to a left hand.

: Change to a right hand.

: Display of the pointer can beturned off. (Even if display of the pointer isturned off, the pointer will appear on themap screen as “+”.)

Push the “�” button on the Remote Touchto zoom in on the map screen and “�” tozoom out. These buttons can also be usedto scroll up and down on list screens.

Push the “MENU” button to set a destina-tion or adjust settings for the audio system,air conditioning system, etc.

You can return to the map screen by push-ing the “MAP/VOICE” button.

CAUTION

� Do not allow fingers, fingernails orhair to become caught in theRemote Touch as this may causean injury.

� Be careful when touching theRemote Touch in extreme tempera-tures as it may become very hot orcold due to the temperature insidethe vehicle.

NOTICE

� Do not allow the Remote Touch tocome into contact with food, liquid,stickers or lit cigarettes as doingso may cause it to change color,emit a strange odor or stop func-tioning.

� Do not subject the Remote Touchto excessive pressure or strongimpact as the knob may bend orbreak off.

� Do not allow coins, contact lensesor other such items to becomecaught in the Remote Touch as thismay cause it to stop functioning.

� Items of clothing may rip if they be-come caught on the Remote Touchknob.

� If your hand or any object is on theRemote Touch knob when the “EN-GINE START STOP” switch isturned to “ACCESSORY” mode,the Remote Touch knob may notoperate properly.

INFORMATIONUnder extremely cold conditions, theRemote Touch knob may react slow-ly.


33

When searching for an address or a name,or entering, letters and numbers can be in-put via the screen.

INFORMATIONKeyboard layout can be changed.(See page 319.)

� To input letters and numbersTo display the alphabet keys, select“A−Z”.

Enter letters by selecting the keys directly.

: Selecting this button erases one

letter. By holding this button, let-ters will continue to be erased.

On certain letter entry screens, letters canbe entered in upper or lower case.

: To enter in lower case.

: To enter in upper case.

Inputting letters andnumbers/List screenoperation


34

� To input symbolsTo display symbol keys, select “Other”.

Enter symbols by selecting the symbolkeys directly.

: Selecting this button erases one

letter. By holding this button, let-ters will continue to be erased.

� To display the list

To search for an address or a name, select“OK”. Matching items from the databaseare listed even if the entered address orname is incomplete.

If the number of matches is five or less, thelist is displayed without selecting “OK”.

INFORMATIONThe number of matching items isshown to the right side of the screen.If the number of matching items ismore than 999, the system displays“∗∗” on the screen.


35

� List screen operationWhen a list is displayed, use the appropri-ate button to scroll through the list.

To shift to the next or previouspage.

Select or to scroll through

the displayed list.

This expresses a displayed screenposition.

If appears to the right of theitem name, the complete name istoo long for the display. Selectto scroll to the end of the name.

Select to scroll to the beginningof the name.

INFORMATIONThe “�” or “�” buttons on the con-troller can be used to scroll up anddown on list screens.

� SortingThe order of a list displayed on the screencan be rearranged.

1. Select “Sort”.

2. Select the desired sorting criteria.Sorting criteria are as follows:

“Distance”: To sort in the order of dis-tance from your current location.

“Date”: To sort in the order of the date.

“Category”: To sort in the order of thecategory.

“Icon”: To sort in the order of the icons.

“Name”: To sort in order by name.


36

You can adjust the contrast, brightness,color and tone of the screen. You can alsoturn the display off, and change the screento either day or night mode.

� Contrast, brightness, color and toneadjustment

The contrast, brightness, color and tone ofthe screen can be adjusted depending onthe brightness of your surroundings. Youcan also turn the display off.

1. Push the “DISP” button.

Contrast and brightness adjustment2. Select the desired button to adjustcontrast and brightness.“Contrast” “+”: Strengthens the contrastof the screen.

“Contrast” “–”: Weakens the contrast ofthe screen.

“Brightness” “+”: Brightens the screen.

“Brightness” “–”: Darkens the screen.

3. After adjusting the screen, select“OK”.The screen goes off when “Screen Off” isselected. To turn the display screen backon, push the “DISP” button again.

INFORMATIONWhen you do not select any button onthe “Display” screen for 20 seconds,the previous screen will be displayed.

Screen adjustment


37

Color and tone adjustment1. Select the desired button to adjustcolor and tone.You can adjust the color and the tone whilethe DVD video, DVD audio and video CDare being played.

“Color” “R”: Strengthens the red color ofthe screen.

“Color” “G”: Strengthens the green colorof the screen.

“Tone” “+”: Strengthens the tone of thescreen.

“Tone” “–”: Weakens the tone of thescreen.

2. After adjusting the screen select“OK”.If your vehicle is equipped with the rearseat entertainment system, the rearscreen turns on or off when “Rear” is se-lected.

The screen goes off when “Screen Off” isselected. To turn the display screen backon, push the “DISP” button again.

INFORMATIONWhen you do not select any button onthe “Display” screen for 20 seconds,the previous screen will be displayed.

� Changing between day mode andnight mode

Depending on the position of the headlightswitch, the screen changes to day mode ornight mode.

To display the screen in day mode evenwith the headlight switch on, select“Day Mode” on the adjustment screenfor brightness and contrast control.If the screen is set in day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this condition ismemorized in the system even with the en-gine turned off.


38

When appears on the screen, an ex-

planation of the function can be displayed.

1. Select .

2. Select the button of the desiredfunction.

When starting the navigation system, thecurrent position is displayed first.

This screen displays the current vehicleposition and a map of the surrounding localarea.

The current vehicle position mark ( 1 ) ap-pears in the center or bottom center of themap screen.

A street name will appear on the bottom ofthe screen, depending on the scale of themap ( 2 ).

You can return to this map screen thatshows your current position at any timefrom any screen by pushing the “MAP/VOICE” button.

While driving, the current vehicle positionmark is fixed on the screen and the mapmoves.

The current position is automatically set asthe vehicle receives signals from the GPS(Global Positioning System). If the currentposition is not correct, it is automaticallycorrected after the vehicle receives sig-nals from the GPS.

INFORMATION� After battery disconnection, or on

a new vehicle, the current positionmay not be correct. As soon as thesystem receives signals from theGPS, the correct current positionis displayed.

� To correct the current positionmanually, see page 335.

Help iconMap screen operation — — Current position display


39

When any point on the map is selected,that point moves to the center of the screenand is shown by the cursor mark ( 1 ).

Use the scroll feature to move the desiredpoint to the center of the screen for lookingat a point on the map that is different fromthe current position of the vehicle.

To scroll over the map, place the pointer ina position near the desired destination andthen press and hold the “ENTER” button.The map will continue scrolling in that di-rection until the button is released.

A street name, city name, etc. of the se-lected point will be shown, depending onthe scale of the map ( 2 ). Distance fromthe current position to will also beshown ( 3 ).

After the screen is scrolled, the map re-mains centered at the selected locationuntil another function is activated. The cur-rent vehicle position mark will continue tomove along your actual route and maymove off the screen. When the “MAP/VOICE” button is pushed, the current ve-hicle position mark returns to the center ofthe screen and the map moves as the ve-hicle proceeds along the designated route.

INFORMATIONWhen the scroll feature is used, thecurrent vehicle position mark maydisappear from the screen. Move themap with a scroll again or push the“MAP/VOICE” button to return to thecurrent vehicle position map locationdisplay.

� To set the cursor position as a des-tination

A specific point on the map can be set asa destination using the scroll function.

Select “Enter ”.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

— Screen scroll operation


40

� To register the cursor position as anaddress book entry

Address book entry registration enableseasy access to a specific point.

Select “Mark”.When you select “Mark”, the followingscreen appears for a few seconds, andthen the map screen returns.

The registered point is shown by on themap.

To change the icon or name, etc., see “ (b)Editing address book entries” on page124.

Up to 100 address book entries can be reg-istered. If there is an attempt to registermore than 100 address book entries, anerror message will appear.


41

� To see information about the iconwhere the cursor is set

To display information about an icon, setthe cursor on it.

POI INFORMATIONWhen the cursor is set on a POI icon, thename and “Info.” are displayed at the topof the screen.

Select “Info.”.

Information such as the name, address,and phone number are displayed.

If “Enter ” is selected, the position of thecursor is set as a destination.

If there is already a set destination, “Go to” and “Add to Route” are displayed.

“Go to ”: To delete the existing destina-tions and set a new one.

“Add to Route”: To add a destination.

To register this POI as an address bookentry, select “Mark”. (See page 123.)

If is selected, the registered tele-

phone number can be called.


42

INFORMATIONThe desired Point of Interest can bedisplayed on the map screen. (See“ — Display POI icons” on page 106.)

ADDRESS BOOK ENTRYINFORMATIONWhen the cursor is set on an address bookentry icon, the name and “Info.” are dis-played at the top of the screen.

Select “Info.”.


43


If “Enter ” is selected, the position of thecursor is set as a destination.




To edit an address book entry, select“Edit”. (See “(b) Editing address book en-tries” on page 124.)

To delete an address book entry, select“Delete”.



DESTINATION INFORMATIONWhen the cursor is set on a destinationicon, the name and “Info.” are displayedon the top of the screen.

Select “Info.”.


To delete a destination, select “Delete”.




44

XM� NavTraffic TEXT INFORMATIONWhen you select the XM� NavTraffic iconon the map, the XM� NavTraffic info. barwill appear on the upper part of the screen.

Select “Info.”.

Traffic information is displayed on thescreen.

Select “Detail” to display detailed trafficevent information.

Any one of the screen configurations canbe selected .

1. Select this button to display the fol-lowing screen.

2. To select the desired screen config-uration, select one of the following but-tons.

— Switching the screens


45

Depending on the conditions, certainscreen configuration buttons cannot beselected.

:To display the single map screen.(See page 45.)

:To display the dual map screen.(See page 46.)

:To display the compass modescreen. (See page 46.)

:To display the freeway screen.(See page 92.)

:To display the turn list screen.(See page 94.)

:To display the arrow screen. (Seepage 94.)

:To display the intersection guid-ance screen or the guidancescreen on the freeway. (See page93.)

� Screen configurationsSINGLE MAPThis is a regular map screen.

While on a different screen, selecting

will display the singlemap screen.

The screen shows the single map.


46

DUAL MAPA map can be displayed split in two.


will display the dual mapscreen.

The screen shows the dual map. The mapon the left is the main map.

The right side map can be edited by select-ing any specific point on the right side map.

This screen can perform the following pro-cedures:

1. Changing the map scale2. Displaying the POI icon3. Show XM� NavTraffic Info. (See page

112.)

4. Changing the orientation of the map

Select “OK” when you complete edi-ting.The screen returns to the dual map screen.

COMPASS MODECurrent vehicle position is indicated with acompass.


will display the compassmode screen.

Information about the destination and cur-rent position, as well as a compass, is dis-played on the screen.

The destination mark is displayed in the di-rection of the destination. When driving re-fer to the longitude and latitude coordi-nates, and the compass, to make sure thatyour vehicle is headed in the direction ofthe destination.

INFORMATIONWhen the vehicle travels out of thecoverage area, the guidance screenchanges to the compass modescreen.


47

Select or to change the scale

of the map display. The scale bar and indi-cator at the bottom of the screen indicatesthe map scale menu. The scale range is150 feet (50 m) to 250 miles (400 km).

Select or until the scale bar

changes normally. By continuing to selectthe button, the scale bar changes smooth-ly.

The scale of the map display can bechanged by selecting the scale bar direct-ly. It is not available while driving.

The map scale is displayed under thenorth−up symbol or heading−up symbol atthe top left of the screen.

Push the “�” button on the Remote Touchto zoom in on the map screen and “�” tozoom out.

INFORMATIONWhen the map scale is at the maxi-mum range of 250 miles (400 km),

is not shown. When the mapscale is at the minimum range of 150feet (50 m), is not shown. Inareas where the foot print map isavailable the map scale changes from

to when at the minimumrange.

For the area which is covered by the footprint map (Some areas in the followingcities: Detroit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), you canswitch to the foot print map on a scale of 75feet (25 m).

� To switch to the foot print map

changes into when the map

is scaled down to 150 feet (50 m).

To display the foot print map, select.

To delete the foot print map display, select

.

INFORMATION� If the map or the current position is

moved to the area which is not cov-ered by the foot print map, thescreen scale automaticallychanges to 150 feet (50 m).

� On the foot print map, a one waystreet is displayed by .

� It is not possible to perform scroll-ing on the foot print map while driv-ing.

— Map scale — Foot print map


48

� To display building informationInformation is available only for buildingsfor which information is recorded on themap disc.

Select “Info.” while the foot print map isdisplayed.

Details of POIs in some buildings may bedisplayed.

For detailed POI information, select thebuilding name. You can see details of theselected POIs.

The orientation of the map can be changedfrom North−up to Heading−up by selectingthe orientation symbol at the top left of thescreen.

Select or .

� North−up screen

� Heading−up screen

North−up symbol

Regardless of the direction of vehicle trav-el, North is always up.

Heading−up symbol

The direction of vehicle travel is always up.A red arrow indicates North.

— Orientation of the map


49

Icon Name

Island

Park

Industry

Business facility

Airport

Military

University

Hospital

Stadium

Shopping mall

Golf

The speech command system enablesyou to operate the navigation system, au-dio system and hands−free system by giv-ing a command.

1. Push the talk switch.After a beep sounds, the “Voice Menu”screen is displayed.

INFORMATIONVoice guidance for the speech com-mand system can be skipped bypushing the talk switch.

— Standard map icons Speech command system—


50

2. After a beep sounds, say the com-mand of your choice.

Speech commands are marked with .

Some commonly used commands are dis-played on the screen. Speak the com-mands as displayed on the screen.

If you want to check the all command list,say “Command list” to display the com-mand list screen. (See “—Command list”on page 54.)

3. Following voice guidance, say thecommand displayed on the screen.If a desired outcome is not shown, or if nochoices are available, say “Go back” orselect “Go Back” to return to the previousscreen.

To cancel speech command recognition,say “Cancel”, select “Cancel”, or pushand hold the talk switch.

If the navigation system does not respondor the confirmation screen does not disap-pear, please push the talk switch and tryagain.

If a speech command cannot be recog-nized within 6 seconds, the voice guidancesystem will say “Pardon?” (“Command notrecognized.” will be displayed on thescreen) and speech command receptionwill restart.

If a speech command cannot be recog-nized two consecutive times, the voiceguidance system will say “Paused. To re-start voice recognition, push the talkswitch.”, then be suspended.


51

� Microphone

It is unnecessary to speak directly intothe microphone when giving a com-mand.

INFORMATION� Wait for the confirmation beep be-

fore speaking a command.� Voice commands may not be rec-

ognized if :� Spoken too quickly� Spoken at a low or high volume� The windows or sunroof are open� Passengers are talking while

voice commands are spoken� The air conditioning speed is set

high� The command is not correct or

clear.Note that certain words, accents,or speech patterns may be diffi-cult for the system to recognize.

� There are some noises such aswind noise, etc.

� Speech command example: Search-ing for a route to your home.

1. Push the talk switch.2. Say “Go home”.If a home address is not registered, thevoice guidance system will say “Yourhome is not set” and you will be promptedto enter a home address. (See page 117.)

When the speech command is recog-nized, a map of the area around your homeis displayed.

3. Select “Enter” or say “Enter”, andthe system starts searching for a routeto your home.To return to the “Voice Menu” screen, say“Go back” or select “Go Back”.

Select “Cancel” or say “Cancel”, and thespeech command system will be can-celed.


52

Due to natural language speech recogni-tion technology, this system enables rec-ognition of a command when spoken natu-rally. However, the system cannotrecognize every variation of each com-mand. In some situations, it is possible toomit the command for the procedure anddirectly state the desired operation.

� Voice recognition top screen ex-pression examples

Command Expression examples

Go Home Take me home.Let’s go home.

Destination I’d like to set a des-tination.

Phone I’d like to make a call.I need to use thephone. Bring up the phonemenu.

Audio Audio menu, please.

Information Let me see the infor-mation menu. Give us the informa-tion menu, please.

Command List Show me the voicecommand list.

� Expression examples for each func-tion

In some situations, It is possible to omit acommand for each procedure and to saythe desired operation directly.

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES WITH THE“Destination” SCREENNormal command recognition —

Destination>Point of Interest>NearHere>Gas> The gas stations near the cur-rent location will be listed.

Natural speech recognition —

Destination> What gas stations arenearby?> The gas stations near the cur-rent location will be listed.

INFORMATIONNatural speech example:“Where’s the nearest Mexican restau-rant?”“Where is the closest ATM?”

— Natural speechinformation (English only)


53

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES WITH THE“Phone Menu” SCREEN (when makinga call using a phonebook)Normal command recognition —

Phone>Dial by Name>Bob>mobile> Thephone number will be displayed.


Phone>Call to Bob on his mobile.> Thephone number will be displayed.

INFORMATIONNatural speech example:“Get me Rob Brown on the phone.”“Please place a call to John on hismobile.”

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES WITH THE“Phone Menu” SCREEN (when makinga call by saying a phone number)Normal command recognition —

Phone>Dial by Number>123−456−789>The phone number will be displayed.


Phone>Call to 123−456−789.> Thephone number will be displayed.

INFORMATIONThe above mentioned command formaking a call can also be recognizedon the voice recognition top screen.Natural speech example:“I’d like to place a call to123−456−789.”“I want to buzz 123−456−789, please.”

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES WITH THE“Information Menu” SCREENNormal command recognition —

Information>XM Nav Weather>Los An-geles, California> The weather informa-tion will be displayed.


Information>Give me a weather reportfor Los Angeles, California.> Theweather information will be displayed.

INFORMATIONNatural speech example:“How about Detroit, Michigan?”

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES WITH THE“Audio Menu” SCREEN (when the au-dio source is in satellite radio mode)Normal command recognition —

Audio>Select Channel Number>90> Thechannel will be changed to the one se-lected.


Audio>Play channel ninety, please> Thechannel will be changed to the one se-lected.

INFORMATIONNatural speech example:“Switch the channel to XM one seven-ty five.”

VOICE RECOGNITION TOP SCREENEXPRESSION EXAMPLESNormal command recognition —

Command List>Dual Map> The map willbe displayed in dual map mode.


Switch to dual map mode.> The map willbe displayed in dual map mode.


54

The system has a voice recognition com-mand list. You can operate the voicerecognition system by saying any com-mand from the displayed command list.However, the XM� NavTraffic or XM�NavWeather commands cannot be usedwhere the XM� NavTraffic or XM� Nav-Weather service is not available. (Fordetails, see “XM� NavTraffic” page 112.)

1. Push the talk switch.

2. Say “Command list”.

3. Say the command of your choice tooperate the system.To confirm commands on the screen, se-

lect or to scroll through the com-

mand list. This function is available onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

INFORMATIONWhen the “Voice Menu” screen is dis-played, all the commands in the voicerecognition command list can be rec-ognized.

— Command list


55

� Speech command example: Chang-ing map screen

1. Push the talk switch.2. Say “Command list”.

3. Say “Dual map”.To confirm commands on the screen, se-



When or is selected, push the talk

switch again and say the command.

The screen shows the dual map.

� Speech command example: Chang-ing map scale

1. Push the talk switch.2. Say “Command list”.

3. Say “Zoom in” or “Zoom out”.To confirm commands on the screen, se-



When or is selected, push the talk

switch again and say the command.

The scale of the map display is changed.


56

COMMAND LIST

Change map mode

Command Action

Map Shows current potion map.

Dual map Changes map to dual mode.

Single map Changes map to single mode.

Compass mode Changes map to compass mode.

Change map scale

Command Action

Zoom in Zoom in.

Zoom out Zoom out.

Right map zoom in Zooms right map in.

Right map zoom out Zooms right map out.

Change map orientation

Command Action

North up Changes map bearing to north up.

Heading up Changes map bearing to heading up.

Map direction Changes map bearing to another direc-tion.

Right map north up Changes right map bearing to north up.

Right map heading up Changes right map bearing to headingup.

Right map direction Changes right map bearing to anotherdirection.

Change guidance mode

Command Action

Arrow mode Changes guidance screen to arrowmode.

Turn list mode Changes guidance screen to turn listmode.


57

Change guidance mode

Freeway mode Changes guidance screen to freewaymode.

Intersection mode Changes guidance screen to Intersec-tion mode.

Set a destination

Command Action

Previous start point Calculates route to previous start point.

Save a point on the map

Command Action

Mark this point Marks the point on the map.

Change route

Command Action

Quick route Changes route to quick route.

Short route Changes route to short route.

Alternate route Changes route to alternate route.

Detour Calculates detour route.

Detour entire route Calculates detour entire route.

Review route

Command Action

Route overview Shows entire route.

Next destination map Shows position of next destination.

First destination map Shows position of first destination.

Second destination map Shows position of second destination.

Third destination map Shows position of third destination.

Fourth destination map Shows position of fourth destination.

Fifth destination map Shows position of fifth destination.

Final destination map Shows position of final destination.


58

Delete destination

Command Action

Delete next destination Deletes position of next destination.

Delete final destination Deletes position of final destination.

Delete all destinations Deletes position of all destination.

Guidance options

Command Action

Pause guidance Pauses the guidance.

Resume guidance Resumes the guidance.

Repeat guidance Repeat voice guidance.

Louder Turns volume up 1 level.

Softer Turns volume down 1 level.

Traffic information

Command Action

Traffic information Displays traffic information.

Show POI icons

Command Action

GAS Displays gas station icons.

PARKING Displays parking icons.

AUTO SERVICE & MAINT. Displays service & maintenance icons.

DEALERSHIPS Displays DEALERSHIP icons.

LEXUS Displays LEXUS dealership icons.

TOYOTA Displays TOYOTA dealership icons.

PARTS STORES Displays PARTS STORE icons.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Displays ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEicons.

AUTOMOBILE CLUBS Displays AUTOMOBILE CLUB icons.

CAR RENTAL AGENCIES Displays CAR RENTAL AGENCY icons.

CAR WASHES Displays car wash icons.

OTHER AUTOMOTIVE Displays other automotive store icons.

DINING Displays dining icons.


59

Show POI icons

Command Action

AMERICAN Displays American restaurant icons.

BAKERIES & DELIS Displays BAKERY AND DELI icons.

BARBECUE & GRILL Displays BARBECUE & GRILL restau-rant icons.

CAJUN/CARIBBEAN Displays Caribbean restaurant icons.

CHINESE Displays Chinese restaurant icons.

COFFEE HOUSES Displays COFFEE HOUSE icons.

FAST FOOD Displays fast food icons.

FRENCH Displays French restaurant icons.

GREEK Displays Greek restaurant icons.

INDIAN Displays Indian restaurant icons.

ICE CREAM & CANDY Displays ICE CREAM & CANDY icons.

ITALIAN Displays Italian restaurant icons.

JAPANESE Displays Japanese restaurant icons.

KOREAN Displays Korean restaurant icons.

LATIN/S.AMERICAN Displays Latin and South American res-taurant

MIDDLE EASTERN Displays MIDDLE EASTERN restauranticons.

MEXICAN Displays Mexican restaurant icons.

PIZZA Displays PIZZERIA icons.

SEAFOOD Displays seafood restaurant icons.

SPANISH Displays SPANISH restaurant icons.

STEAK HOUSES Displays STEAK HOUSE icons.

THAI Displays Thai restaurant icons.

VIETNAMESE Displays Vietnamese restaurant icons.

OTHER RESTAURANTS Displays other restaurant icons.

GROCERIES Displays grocery store icons.

SHOPPING MALLS Displays shopping mall icons.

CONVENIENCE STORES Displays convenience store icons.


60

Show POI icons

Command Action

HOME IMPROVEMENT Displays HOME IMPROVEMENT icons.

OFFICE & ELECTRONICS Displays OFFICE AND ELECTRONICSicons.

RETAIL & DEPT STORES Displays RETAIL AND DEPARTMENTSTORE

DEPARTMENT STORES Displays department store icons.

BOOK STORES Displays BOOK STORE icons.

CLOTHING & SHOES Displays CLOTHING & SHOES icons.

HOBBIES & CRAFTS Displays HOBBY & CRAFT icons.

JEWELRY Displays JEWELRY icons.

SPORTING EQUIPMENT Displays SPORTING EQUIPMENTicons.

RECREATIONAL VEHICLES Displays RECREATIONAL VEHICLEicons.

OTHER RETAIL STORES Displays other retail store icons.

POLICE STATIONS Displays police station icons.

FIRE STATIONS Displays Fire station icons.

HOSPITALS Displays hospital icons.

PHARMACIES Displays pharmacy icons.

OTHER MED. FACILITIES Displays OTHER MEDICAL FACILITYicons.

HOTELS Displays hotel icons.

REST AREAS Displays rest area icons.

AIRPORTS Displays airport icons.

BUS STATIONS Displays bus station icons.

TRAIN STATIONS Displays train station icons.

PORTS & FERRIES Displays PORTS & FERRY icons.

TAXIS & SHUTTLES Displays TAXIS & SHUTTLE icons.

FULL−SERVICE BANKS Displays FULL−SERVICE BANKS icons.

ATMs Displays ATM icons.

ATTRACTIONS Displays attractions icons.


61

Show POI icons

Command Action

ENTERTAINMENT Displays entertainment icons.

TOURIST INFORMATION Displays tourist information icons.

PARKS & BEACHES Displays PARK & BEACH icons.

SPORTS & FITNESS Displays SPORTS & FITNESS icons.

BOWLING CENTERS Displays bowling icons.

GOLF COURSES Displays golf course icons.

HORSE RACING Displays horse racing icons.

HEALTH & FITNESS CLUBS Displays health and fitness club icons.

MARINAS Displays marina icons.

MOTOR SPORTS Displays motor sports icons.

SKI RESORTS Displays ski resort icons.

SPORTS COMPLEXES Displays sports complex icons.

NIGHTLIFE Displays nightlife icons.

PERFORMING ARTS Displays PERFORMING ART icons.

CITY CENTERS Displays city center icons.

GOVERNMENT Displays government icons.

SCHOOLS Displays school icons.

DRY CLEANERS Displays dry cleaning icons.

FLORISTS Displays florist icons.

LIBRARIES Displays library icons.

PERSONAL GROOMING Displays PERSONAL GROOMINGicons.

SHIPPING & COPIES Displays SHIPPING & COPY icons.

POST OFFICES Displays post office icons.

OTHER SERVICES Displays OTHER SERVICE icons.

Delete POI icons

Command Action

Clear all icons Deletes all POI icons.


62

Select audio mode

Command Action

Radio Selects audio mode to radio.

AM Selects audio mode to AM.

FM Selects audio mode to FM.

FM1 Selects audio mode to FM1.

FM2 Selects audio mode to FM2.

Satellite radio Selects audio mode to satellite radio.

Satellite radio 1 Selects audio mode to satellite radio 1.



CD Selects audio mode to CD.

DVD Selects audio mode to DVD.

CD changer Selects audio mode to CD changer.

DVD changer Selects audio mode to DVD changer.

Auxiliary Selects audio mode to auxiliary.

Bluetooth audio Selects audio mode to Bluetooth� audio.

iPod Selects audio mode to iPod�.

USB audio Selects audio mode to USB audio.

Audio On/Off

Command Action

Audio on / Audio off Turns audio system on and off.

Radio operation

Command Action

Seek up Seeks up for a radio station.

Seek down Seeks down for a radio station.

Type up Seeks up for program type.

Type down Seeks down for program type.


63

Disc operation

Command Action

Track up Tracks up for a track number.

Track down Tracks down for a track number.

Previous track Selects previous track.

Disc up Disc up.

Disc down Disc down.

Climate command

Command Action

Automatic climate control Turns air conditioner on and off.

Raise temperature Turns temperature up.

Lower temperature Turns temperature down.

?? degrees (?? is 65 to 85) Selects temperature from 65 to 80 de-grees.

Phone

Command Action

Dial by number Calls by phone number.

Dial by name Calls by giving a voice tag in thephonebook.

Select phone Selects phone.


64

INFORMATION� The function that cannot be used

according to the vehicle is pro-vided.

� Voice recognition language can bechanged. (See “� Selecting a lan-guage” on page 318.)

SECTION 2

NAVIGATION SYSTEM: DESTINATION SEARCH

65


Navigation system: destination search

� Destination search 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the search area 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by Home 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by Preset destinations 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Address” 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Point of Interest” 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Previous Destinations” 79. . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Address Book” 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Emergency” 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Intersection & Freeway” 81. . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Map” 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Coordinates” 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting set destinations 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Starting route guidance 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


66

Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.

You can use one of 10 different methods tosearch your destination. (See pages 68through 85.)

INFORMATIONWhen searching the destination, theresponse to the screen button may beslow.

Change the selected region in order to seta destination from a different region by us-ing “Address”, “Point of Interest” or “Inter-section & Freeway”.

1. Select “Search Area” to display amap of the United States and Canadadivided into 12 regions. (For map data-base information and updates, see “Mapdatabase information and updates” onpage 395.)

2. Select one of “US1” through “CAN”to select a region to search.3. Select “OK” and the previousscreen returns.

Destination search — — Selecting the search area


67

U.S.A.

ButtonStates included in the searchregion

“US1”IdahoOregonWashington

“US2”CaliforniaNevada

“US3”

ArizonaColoradoMontanaNew MexicoUtahWyoming

“US4”

IowaKansasMinnesotaMissouriNorth DakotaNebraskaSouth Dakota

“US5”OklahomaTexas

“US6”

IllinoisIndianaKentuckyMichiganOhioWisconsin

“US7”

ArkansasAlabamaLouisianaMississippiTennessee

“US8”

ConnecticutMassachusettsMaineNew HampshireNew JerseyNew YorkRhode IslandVermont

“US9”

Washington, D.C.DelawareMarylandNew JerseyPennsylvaniaVirginiaWest Virginia

“US10”

FloridaGeorgiaNorth CarolinaSouth Carolina

“HI” Hawaii

Canada

ButtonProvinces and regions in-cluded in the search region

“CAN”All provinces and regions inCanada included in this button.


68

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.

2. Select “Go Home”.The screen changes and displays the maplocation for home and the route prefer-ence. (See “Starting route guidance” onpage 86.)

If home has not been registered, a mes-sage will be displayed and the settingscreen will automatically appear.

To use this function, it is necessary to seta “Home” address. (To register “Home”,see page 117.)

INFORMATIONGuidance starts from the current ve-hicle position to your home if “OK” isselected even while driving.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.

2. Select any of the preset destinationbuttons on the “Destination” screen.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the preset destination point andthe route preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

If a preset destination point has not beenregistered, a message will be displayedand the setting screen will automaticallyappear.

To use this function, it is necessary to set“Preset Destinations”. (To register “PresetDestinations”, see page 119.)

INFORMATIONGuidance starts from the current ve-hicle position to the preset destina-tion point if “Go to ” is selectedeven while driving.

— Destination search byHome

— Destination search byPreset destinations


69

There are 2 ways to search a destinationby address.(a) Search by city(b) Search by street address

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Address” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

3. Select the button for the desiredmethod.

(a) Selecting a city to search1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Address” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

3. Select “City”.

4. Input a city name.

5. Select the button of the desired cityname from the displayed list.

— Destination search by“Address”


70

6. Input the street name and select“OK”.

7. When the desired street name isfound, select the corresponding but-ton.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

8. Input a house number.

If the same address exists in more thanone city, the current screen changes to theaddress list screen.


71

SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES

1. Select “Last 5 Cities”.

2. Select the button of the desired cityname.If the navigation system has never beenused, this function will not be available.

The current screen changes to the screenfor inputting a street name. (See “(a) Se-lecting a city to search” on page 69.)

(b) Search by street address1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Address” on the “Destina-tion” screen.

3. Select “Street Address”.

4. Select numbers directly on thescreen to input a house number.After inputting a house number, select“OK” to display the screen for inputting astreet name.

5. Input the street name and select“OK”.


72

6. When the desired street name isfound, select the corresponding but-ton.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

If the same address exists in more thanone city, the current screen changes input-ting the city name or to the address listscreen.

7. Input a city name.


INFORMATIONYou can search for a street name us-ing just the body.Example : S WESTERN AVEYou can input “S WESTERN AVE”,“WESTERN AVE” or “WESTERN”


73

There are 3 ways to search by Points of In-terest.(a) Search by name(b) Search by category(c) Search by phone #

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Points of Interest” on the“Destination” screen.


(a) Search by “Name”1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Point of Interest” on the“Destination” screen.3. Select “Name” on the “Point of In-terest” screen.

4. Input the name of the Point of Inter-est.

5. Select the button of the desired des-tination.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

When inputting the name of a specificPoint of Interest, and there are two or moresites with the same name, the list screenis displayed.

INFORMATIONTo search for a facility name usingmultiple search words, put a spacebetween each word.

— Destination search by“Point of Interest”


74

Select the button of the desired des-tination.If the same name exists in more than onecity, a search can be performed more easi-ly with “City” and “Category”. (See “�Selecting a city to search” on page 74 and“� Selecting from the categories” on page75.)

INFORMATIONThe desired Point of Interest can bedisplayed on the map screen. (See“ — Display POI icons” on page 106.)

� Selecting a city to search

1. Select “City”.

2. Input the city name.


INFORMATIONTo cancel the city setting, select “AnyCity”.


75

� Selecting from the categories

Select “Category”.

If the desired POI category is on thescreen, select the name to display a de-tailed list of the POI category.

If the desired POI category is not on thescreen, select “List All Categories” to listall POI categories.

When the desired category is selected, thePOI name list screen is displayed.

(b) Search by “Category”The destination can be set by selecting thesearch point and the POI category.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Point of Interest” on the“Destination” screen.3. Select “Category” on the “Point ofInterest” screen.

Set the search point by the followingmethod:1. Set the search point from near the ve-

hicle’s current position2. Set the search point from along the

chosen route3. Set the search point from near a city

center4. Set the search point from near a des-

tination

It is possible to display the names of POIslocated within approximately 200 miles(320 km) from the selected search point.


76

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROMNEAR HERESelect “Near Here”.The search point is set at the current posi-tion, and the “POI Category” screen will bedisplayed. (See page 78.)

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROMALONG MY ROUTESelect “Along My Route”.The search point is set and the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed. (See page78.)

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROMNEAR CITY CENTER1. Select “Near City Center”.

2. Input the city center name.

3. Select the button of the desired citycenter name.The search point is set and the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed. (See page78.)


77

SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES1. Select “Near City Center”.

2. Select “Last 5 Cities”.

3. Select the button of the desired citycenter name.The search point is set and the “POI Cate-gory” screen will be displayed. (See page78.)

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROMNEAR A DESTINATION1. Select “Near a Destination”.

2. Select the button of the desired des-tination.The search point is set and the “POIName” screen will be displayed. (Seepage 78.)


78

� To search POIs near the searchpoint

When the search point is set, the “POICategory” screen will be displayed.

Select the desired POI category.If the desired POI category is not on thescreen, select “List All Categories” to listall POI categories.

Select the desired POI category fromthe list.

By selecting the button of the desired item,the screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

(c) Search by “Phone #”1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Point of Interest” on the“Destination” screen.3. Select “Phone #” on the “Point of In-terest” screen.

4. Input a telephone number.5. After inputting a telephone number,select “OK”.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

If there is more than one site with the samenumber, the following screen will be dis-played.


79

INFORMATION� If there is no match for the tele-

phone number inputted, a list ofidentical numbers with differentarea codes will be displayed.

� To set an address book entry as adestination using the phone num-ber, the number must already beregistered. (See page 127.)

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Previous Destinations” onthe “Destination” screen.

The previous starting point and up to 100previously set destinations are displayedon the screen.

3. Select the button of the desired des-tination.“Delete”: To delete the previous destina-tion. (To delete previous destinations, seepage 133.)

The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

INFORMATIONThe list of previous destinations canalso be deleted by selecting “DeletePrevious Dest.” on the “NavigationSettings” screen when the vehicle isstopped. (See “ — Deleting previousdestinations” on page 133.)

— Destination search by“Previous Destinations”


80

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Address Book” on the “Des-tination” screen.A list of registered address book entries isdisplayed.

3. Select the button of the desired ad-dress book entry.“Options”: To register or edit addressbook. (See page 122.)

The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Emergency” on the secondpage of the “Destination” screen.The display changes to a screen to selectpolice stations, dealers, hospitals or firestations. While driving, only nearby policestations, dealers, hospitals, or fire stationsare shown. The current position is shownwith an address, and the latitude and thelongitude at the top of the screen.

3. Select the desired emergency cate-gory.The selected emergency category list isdisplayed.

— Destination search by“Address Book”

— Destination search by“Emergency”


81

4. Select the button of the desired des-tination.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

INFORMATIONThe navigation system does notguide in areas where route guidanceis unavailable. (See page 394.)

There are 2 ways to search.(a) Search by intersection(b) Search by Freeway Entrance/Exit

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Intersection & Freeway” onthe second page of the “Destination”screen.


— Destination search by“Intersection & Freeway”


82

(a) Search by “Intersection”1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Intersection & Freeway” onthe second page of the “Destination”screen.3. Select “Intersection” on the “Inter-section & Freeway” screen.

4. Input the name of the first intersect-ing street which are located near thedestination to be set.5. Select “OK”.

6. Select the button of the desireditem.

7. Input the name of the second inter-secting street.

8. Select the button of the desireditem.After inputting the two intersecting streets,the screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)


83

If the same two streets cross at more thanone intersection, the screen changes anddisplays the menu to select the city namewhere the streets intersect. Select the city,and the map location of the selected des-tination and the route preference. (See“Starting route guidance” on page 86.)

(b) Search by “Freeway Entrance/Exit”1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Intersection & Freeway” onthe second page of the “Destination”screen.3. Select “Freeway Entrance/Exit” onthe “Intersection & Freeway” screen.

4. To input a freeway name.Be sure to use the complete name of thefreeway or highway, including the hyphen,when entering the destination. Freewaysand interstates use an “I” (I−405). US high-ways use the state designation before thenumber (CA−118).

5. Select the desired freeway by se-lecting the button.


84

6. Either a freeway “Entrance” or“Exit” can be selected.

7. To input a freeway entrance or exitname.8. Select “OK”.

9. Select the button of the desired en-trance or exit name.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination and theroute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Map” on the second page ofthe “Destination” screen.

The screen changes and displays the maplocation that was previously displayed justbefore the destination input operation andthe route preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

INFORMATIONGuidance starts if “OK” is selectedeven while driving. However, the cur-sor cannot be moved.

— Destination search by“Map”


85

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Coordinates” on the secondpage of the “Destination” screen.

3. Input the latitude and the longitude.4. When the input is finished, select“OK”.By selecting the button of the desiredpoint, the screen changes and displays themap location of the selected destinationand the route preference. (See “Startingroute guidance” on page 86.)

A set destination can be deleted.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Destination”.2. Select “Del. Dest.” on the “Destina-tion” screen.When more than one destination is set, alist will be displayed on the screen.

3. Select the destination for deletion.“Select All”: To select all destinations onthe list.

“Unselect All”: To unselect all of the se-lected destinations.

4. Select “Delete”.

A message appears to confirm the requestto delete.

5. To delete the destination(s), select“Yes”.If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be re-covered.

If “No” is selected, the previous screenwill return.

— Destination search by“Coordinates” — Deleting set destinations


86

The system searches for the guidanceroute again, and displays the entire route.

INFORMATIONSet destinations can also be deletedby selecting “Route”. (See “ — Delet-ing destinations” on page 99.)

After inputting the destination, the screenchanges and displays the map location ofthe selected destination and the route pref-erence.

1. Scroll the map to the desired point.“Adjust Location”: To adjust the positionin smaller increments.

When an arrow facing the desired pointis selected, the map scrolls in that di-rection.The scroll stops when the selection of thearrow is released.

2. Select “Go to ”.

The system starts route search and dis-plays recommended routes.




“Info.”: If this button is displayed on thetop of the screen, select it to view itemssuch as name, address, and phone num-ber.

Starting route guidance


87

1 Current position2 Destination point3 Type of the route and the distance4 Distance of the entire route

3. To start guidance, select “OK”.“Turn List”: The following screen displaysthe list of the roads up to the destination.

“3 Routes”: To select the desired routefrom 3 possible routes. (See page 88.)

“Edit Route”: To change the route. (Seepage 89.)

INFORMATION� Guidance can be paused or re-

sumed. (See “— Pausing and re-suming guidance” on page 105.)

� If “OK” is selected until a beepsounds, demo mode will start.Push the “MAP/VOICE” button tofinish Demo mode.

� The route for returning may not bethe same as that for going.

� The route guidance to the destina-tion may not be the shortest routenor a route without traffic conges-tion.

� Route guidance may not be avail-able if there is no road data for thespecified location.

� When setting the destination on amap with a scale larger than 0.5miles (800 m), the map scalechanges to 0.5 miles (800 m) auto-matically. Set the destinationagain.

� If a destination is entered, the roadnearest to the point you selected isset as the destination.

CAUTION

Be sure to obey traffic regulationsand keep road conditions in mindwhile driving. If a traffic sign on theroad has been changed, the routeguidance may provide incorrect in-formation.


88

3 ROUTES SELECTION

1. To select the desired route from 3routes, select “3 Routes”.

2. Select “Quick”, “Alt.” or “Short” toselect the desired route.“Quick”: Recommended route. This route is indicated by an orange line.

“Alt.”: Alternative route.This route is indicated by a purple line.

“Short”: A route by which you can reachthe destination in the shortest distance.This route is indicated by a green line.

“Info.”: To display the following informa-tion about each of the 3 routes.

1 Time necessary for the entire trip2 Distance of the entire trip3 Toll road4 Freeway5 Ferry


89

� Edit routeYou can again designate the conditions ofthe route to the destination.

Select “Edit Route”.

“Add”: To add destinations. (See page98.)

“Delete”: To delete destinations. (Seepage 99.)

“Reorder”: To reorder destinations. (Seepage 98.)

“Preferences”: A number of choices areprovided on the conditions which the sys-tem uses to determine the route to the des-tination. (See page 103)

INFORMATION� Even if the “Freeways” indicator is

dimmed, the route cannot avoid in-cluding a freeway in some cases.

� If the calculated route includes atrip by ferry, the route guidanceshows a sea route. After you travelby ferry, the current vehicle posi-tion may be incorrect. Upon recep-tion of GPS signals, it is automati-cally corrected.


90

SECTION 3

NAVIGATION SYSTEM: ROUTE GUIDANCE

91


Avigation system: route guidance

� Route guidance screen 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Typical voice guidance prompts 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Distance and time to destination 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Setting and deleting destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting destinations 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Setting route 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detour setting 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route overview 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route preference 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pausing and resuming guidance 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Show on map 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display POI∗ icons 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route trace 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� XM� NavTraffic 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

∗: Point of Interest


92

During route guidance, various types ofguidance screens can be displayed de-pending on conditions.

� Screen layout

1 Distance to the next turn and thearrow indicating turning direction

2 Current street name3 Distance and travel/arrival time to

the destination4 Current position5 Guidance route

INFORMATION� If the vehicle goes off the guidance

route, the route is searched again.

� For some areas, the roads have notbeen completely digitized in ourdatabase. For this reason, theroute guidance may select roadthat should not be traveled on.

� When you arrive at your destina-tion, the destination name will bedisplayed on the top of the screen.Selecting “��Off” clears the dis-play.

� When the head−up display is on,turn−by−turn guidance arrows willbe displayed on the windshield.

� During freeway drivingDuring freeway driving, the freeway exit in-formation screen will be displayed.

This screen displays the distance to thenext junction and exit, or POIs in the vicin-ity of the freeway exit.

1 Current position2 Points of Interest that are close to

a freeway exit3 Exit number and junction name4 Distance from the current position

to the exit or junction5 Current street name

“Map”: To display the selected map of theexit vicinity.

: To scroll for farther junctions or exits.

: To scroll for closer junctions or exits.

: To scroll for the closest 3 junctions or

exits.

Route guidance screen


93

� When approaching a freeway exit orjunction

When the vehicle approaches an exit orjunction, the guidance screen for the free-way will be displayed.

1 Next street name2 Distance from the current position

to the exit or junction3 Current position

“Off”: The guidance screen on freewaydisappears and the map screen appears.

When selecting or push-ing the “MAP/VOICE” button, the guid-ance screen on freeway reappears.

� When approaching an intersectionWhen the vehicle approaches an intersec-tion, the intersection guidance screen willbe displayed.

1 Next street name2 Distance to the intersection3 Current position

“Off”: The intersection guidance screendisappears and the map screen appears.

When selecting or push-ing the “MAP/VOICE” button, the inter-section guidance screen reappears.


94

� Other screensTURN LIST SCREENOn this screen, the list of turns on the guid-ance route can be viewed.

Selecting during guid-ance displays the turn list.

1 Next street name or destinationname

2 Turn direction3 Distance between turns4 Current street name

ARROW SCREENOn this screen, information about nextturns on the guidance route can be viewed.

Selecting during guid-ance displays the arrow screen.

1 Exit number, street name contain-ing number or next street name

2 Turn direction3 Distance to the next turn4 Current street name


95

The voice guidance provides various mes-sages as you approach an intersection, orother point where you need to maneuverthe vehicle.

4.7 miles

0.5 miles

1 “Proceed about 5 miles to Mainstreet.”

2 “In half of a mile, right turn ontoMain street.”

3 “Right turn.”

4 (Beep sound only)

INFORMATION� The street names may not be pro-

nounced correctly or clearly due totext−to−speech function.

� On freeways, interstates or otherhighways with higher speed limits,the voice guidance will be made atearlier points than on city streets inorder to allow time to maneuver.

4.2 miles

0.5 miles

1 “Proceed about 4 miles to thetraffic circle.”

2 “In half of a mile, traffic circleahead, and then 3rd exit aheadonto Main street.”

3 “The 3rd exit ahead.”

4 “The exit ahead.”

5 (Beep sound only)

Typical voice guidanceprompts


96

One−way road

One−way road

∗: The system indicates a U−turn if the dis-tance between two one−way roads (of op-posite directions) is less than 50 feet (15m) in residential areas or 164 feet (50 m)in non−residential areas.

1 “In half of a mile, make a legalU−turn.”

2 “Make a legal U−turn ahead.”

3 (Beep sound only)

The system announces the approach tothe final destination.

1 “Your destination is ahead.”

2 “You have arrived at your des-tination. The route guidance isnow finished.”

INFORMATION� If the system cannot determine the

current vehicle position correctly(in cases of poor GPS signal recep-tion), the voice guidance may bemade early or delayed.

� If you did not hear the voice guid-ance command, push the “MAP/VOICE” button to hear it again.

� To adjust the voice guidance vol-ume, see “� Voice volume” onpage 327.


97

When the vehicle is on the guidance route,the distance and the estimated travel/arriv-al time to the destination are displayed.When the vehicle is not on the guidanceroute, the distance and the direction of thedestination are displayed.

When driving on the guidance route andmore than one destination is set, the dis-tance and the estimated travel/arrival timefrom the current position to each destina-tion are displayed.

1. Select this button to display the fol-lowing screen.

2. Select the number button to displaythe desired destination.

The distance, the estimated travel timeand the estimated arrival time from the cur-rent position to the selected destinationare displayed.

Estimated travel time is dis-played.

Estimated arrival time is dis-played.

To switch to estimated arrivaltime.

To switch to estimated traveltime.

Displayed while driving off theguidance route. The destina-tion direction is indicated byan arrow.

INFORMATIONWhen the vehicle is on the guidanceroute, the distance measured alongthe route is displayed. Travel timeand arrival time is calculated basedon the set vehicle speed information.(See page 331.) However, when thevehicle is not on the guidance route,the distance is the linear distance be-tween the current position and thedestination.

Distance and time todestination


98

You can add destinations and searchagain for the routes.

1. Select “Route”.

2. Select “Add”.3. Input an additional destination inthe same way as the destinationsearch. (See “Destination search” onpage 66.)

4. Select the desired “Add DestinationHere” to determine the arrival order ofthe additional destination.

When more than one destination is set,you can change the arrival order of thedestinations.


2. Select “Reorder”.

3. Select the desired destination andselect “Move Up” or “Move Down” tochange the arrival order.4. Select “OK”.5. After selecting the destinations, se-lect “OK”.The system searches for the guidanceroute again, and displays the entire route.

Setting and deletingdestinations —— Adding destinations — Reordering destinations


99

A set destination can be deleted.


2. Select “Delete”.When more than one destination is set, alist will be displayed on the screen.

3. Select the destination for deletion.“Select All”: To select all destinations onthe list.

“Unselect All”: To unselect all of the se-lected destinations.

A message appears to confirm the requestto delete.

4. To delete the destination(s), select“Yes”.If “Yes” is selected, the data cannot be re-covered.

If “No” is selected, the previous screenwill return.

The system searches for the guidanceroute again, and displays the entire route.

— Deleting destinations


100

While the route guidance is operating, youcan change the route to detour around asection of the route where a delay iscaused by road repairs, or an accident,etc.


2. Select “Detour”.

3. Select the button below to select thedesired detour distance.“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles(km)”: Select one of these buttons to startthe detour process. After detouring, thesystem returns to the original guidanceroute.

“Whole Route”: By selecting this button,the system will calculate an entire newroute to the destination.

“Around Traffic”: If you select this button,the system will search for the route basedon the traffic congestion information re-ceived from XM� NavTraffic. For details,see “XM� NavTraffic” on page 112.

Setting route —— Detour setting


101

This picture shows an example of how thesystem would guide around a delaycaused by a traffic jam.1 This position indicates the location of

a traffic jam caused by road repairs oran accident.

2 This route indicates the detour sug-gested by the system.

INFORMATION� When your vehicle is on a freeway,

the detour distance selections are5, 15, and 25 miles (km).

� The system may not be able to cal-culate a detour route depending onthe selected distance and sur-rounding road conditions.


2. Select “Overview”.

The entire route from the current positionto the destination is displayed.

“OK”: To start guidance.

“Turn List”: The following screen displaysthe list of the roads up to the destination.

“Preview”: To preview the route.

— Route overview


102

You can scroll through the list of roads by

selecting or . However, not all

road names in the route may appear on thelist. If a road changes its name without re-quiring a turn (such as on a street that runsthrough two or more cities), the namechange will not appear on the list. Thestreet names will be displayed in orderfrom the starting point, along with the dis-tance to the next turn.

These marks indicate thedirection in which you shouldturn at an intersection.

Selecting “Map” on the “Turn List”screen.The point which you choose is displayedon the map screen.

� Route preview


2. Select “Overview”.

3. Select “Preview”.


103

: To indicate the next destination.

: To preview the route to the nextdestination.

: To preview the route to the nextdestination in fast−forward mode.

: To stop the preview.

: To review the route to the previousdestination or starting point.

: To review the route to the previousdestination or starting point infast−forward mode.

: To indicate the previous destina-tion or starting point.

� To select route typeYou can designate the route conditions ofthe route to the destination.


2. Select “Preferences”.

3. Select “Quick”, “Short” or “Alter-nate” and select “OK”.

— Route preference


104

The entire route from the starting point tothe destination is displayed.

“OK”: To start guidance.

“Edit Route”: To change a route. (Seepage 89.)

� To select route featuresA number of choices are provided on theconditions which the system uses to deter-mine the route to the destination.


2. Select “Preferences” to change theconditions that determine the route tothe destination.

3. Select the desired route preferenceby selecting the button.When searching for a route, the system willavoid routes when the indicator is off.

4. After choosing the desired routepreference, select “OK”.


105

� Starting route from adjacent roadYou can start the route guidance from theadjacent road.

(ex. When route guidance is set on thefreeway, but the vehicle is driven parallelalong the freeway.)


2. Select “Preferences”.

3. Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.When there is no adjacent road, this buttonwill not be displayed.

� To pause guidance


2. Select “Pause Guidance”.

INFORMATIONWithout route guidance, “PauseGuidance” cannot be used.

The screen will return to the current posi-tion map without route guidance.

— Pausing and resumingguidance


106

� To resume guidance


2. Select “Resume Guidance”.

The screen will change to the current posi-tion map with route guidance.

Points of Interest such as gas stations andrestaurants can be displayed on the mapscreen. You can also set their location asa destination and use them for route guid-ance.

1. Select “Show on Map”.

2. Select “Select POI” to display a par-ticular type of Point of Interest on thescreen.When the Points of Interest to be displayedon the map screen have already been set,“Change POI” is displayed.

A screen with a limited choice of Points ofInterest will be displayed. (To change thedisplayed POI, see page 333.)

Show on map —— Display POI icons


107

� Selecting POIs to be displayedUp to 5 categories of icons can be dis-played on the screen.

Select the desired Point of Interestcategory to display POI location sym-bols on the map screen.By selecting the desired POI category andthen selecting “OK”, the selected POIicons are displayed on the map screen.

To turn off the Points of Interest icons onthe map screen, select “Clear”.

“Other POIs”: If the desired Point of Inter-est can not be found on the limited choicescreen, select this button.

“Find Local POI”: When searching for thenearest Point of Interest, select this button.Then choose one of the categories. Thesystem will list the points within 200 miles(320 km). (See page 108.)

Select “Other POIs” on the “Select POIIcons” screen.When a Point of Interest category is se-lected from either the limited list or thecomplete list, the screen will display sym-bols of those locations on the map screen.

Select the desired POI categories.

The selected category icon appears on thetop left of the screen.

By selecting the desired POI category andthen selecting “OK”, the selected POIicons are displayed on the map screen.



108

Select the desired POI categories fromthe list.

The selected category icon appears on thetop left of the screen.

By selecting the desired POI category andthen selecting “OK”, the selected POIicons are displayed on the map screen.

To return to the POI category selectionscreen, select “More”.

� To display the local POI listPoints of Interest that are within 200 miles(320 km) of the current position will belisted from among the selected categories.

1. Select “Find Local POI” on the “Se-lect POI Icons” screen.

2. Select the button of the desiredPoint of Interest.The selected Points of Interest are dis-played on the map screen.

“Near...”: To search for Points of Interestnear the current position or along theroute.


109

“Near Here” : When “Near Here” is se-lected, the list of Points of Interest near thecurrent position will be displayed.

“Along My Route” : When “Along MyRoute” is selected, the list of Points of In-terest along the route will be displayed.

� To set a POI as a destinationYou can select one of the Points of Interesticons on the map screen as a destinationand use it for route guidance.

1. Directly select the Point of Interesticon that you want to set as a destina-tion.The map will shift so that the icon is cen-tered on the screen and overlaps with thecursor . At this time, the distance fromthe current position is displayed on thescreen. The distance shown is measuredas a straight line from the current vehicleposition to the POI.

2. When the desired Point of Interestoverlaps with the cursor, select “Enter

”.The screen changes and displays the maplocation of the selected destination androute preference. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)


110

� To hide POI icons


2. Select “POI Icons”.The “POI Icons” indicator is dimmed.

The map screen will be displayed with thePOI icons hidden.

To display the POI icons again, select “POIIcons” on the “Show on Map” screen.

It is possible to store the traveled route upto 124 miles (200 km) and retrace the routeon the display.

INFORMATIONThis feature is available on the mapwith more detailed map scale than 30mile (50 km).

— Route trace


111

� To start recording the route trace


2. Select “Route Trace”. “Route Trace” indicator is highlighted.

� To stop recording the route trace


2. Select “Route Trace”. The followingscreen will be displayed.

Selecting “Yes” stops recording and theroute trace remains displayed on thescreen.

Selecting “No” stops recording and theroute trace is erased.


112

The XM� NavTraffic service that allows thenavigation system to display traffic infor-mation on the map is available if your satel-lite radio tuner can receive traffic informa-tion.

To receive the XM� NavTraffic service, asubscription to the XM� Satellite Radiowith NavTraffic is necessary.

The XM� NavTraffic is available in the con-tiguous 48 U.S. states and some Canadiancities. For details about the XM� NavTraf-fic service coverage area, refer towww.xmradio.com (U.S.A.) or www.xmra-dio.ca (CANADA).

� How to activate the XM� NavTrafficservice

To receive the XM� NavTraffic service,it is necessary to activate the service.To activate the service, an extra fee isrequired in addition to subscriptionfees for the XM� Satellite Radio. Fordetails about service and activation,call XM� Listener Care Center at1−877−515−3987 (U.S.A.) or1−877−438−9677 (CANADA).

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by select-ing “channel 000” on the radio. For details,see “(b) Displaying the radio ID” on page181.

XM� Satellite Radio has the responsibilityfor all fees and service, they are subject tochange.

The following operations can be per-formed.

� Show XM� NavTraffic InformationTraffic information is displayed on the map.(See page 113.)

� Auto Avoid TrafficIf any heavy congestion or moderate traffichas been detected on the guidance route,it may be possible for you to select anotherroute offered by the system. (See page332.)

� Traffic Voice GuidanceTraffic information is provided using voiceguidance. (See page 327.)

� Show Free Flowing TrafficFreely flowing traffic is shown by the arrowon the map. (See page 333.)

INFORMATION� Traffic voice guidance is available

only in English. To select English,see “� Selecting a language” onpage 318.

� When the “Traffic Information” in-dicator is dimmed, “Auto AvoidTraffic”, “Traffic Voice Guidance”and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”will not operate.

XM� NavTraffic


113

� Show XM� NavTraffic information


2. Select “Traffic Information”. “Traffic Information” indicator is high-lighted.

XM� NavTraffic information is displayedon the map.

� On Map screen

� On Freeway information screen


114

1 XM� NavTraffic iconWhen any traffic information has beenreceived, the XM� NavTraffic icon willappear on the map screen. Selecting theXM� NavTraffic icon on the screen willstart voice guidance for the traffic informa-tion. (See page 44.)

INFORMATIONWhen the XM� NavTraffic icon is se-lected, voice guidance for the trafficinformation will start even if “Off” for“Traffic Voice Guidance” is selected.

2 XM� NavTraffic information arrowWhen any XM� NavTraffic information hasbeen received, the XM� NavTraffic infor-mation arrow will appear on the mapscreen. The color of the arrow changesdepending on the traffic information re-ceived.

“Orange”: Heavy congestion

“Yellow”: Moderate traffic

“Green”: Freely flowing traffic

3 XM� NavTraffic indicatorWhen any XM� NavTraffic information hasbeen received, the XM� NavTraffic indica-tor will appear on the screen. The color ofthe indicator changes depending on thetraffic information received.

“White”: Traffic information has been re-ceived.

“Yellow”: Traffic restriction information onthe guidance route has been received(screen button*).

“Orange”: Congestion information on theguidance route has been received (screenbutton*).

*: Selecting the XM� NavTraffic indicatorwill start voice guidance.

SECTION 4

NAVIGATION SYSTEM: MEMORY POINTS

115


Navigation system: memory points

� Navigation settings 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Home” 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Preset Destinations” 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Address Book” 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Areas to Avoid” 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting previous destinations 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


116

Points or areas on the map can be regis-tered.

The registered points can be used on the“Destination” screen. (See “ — Destinationsearch by Home” on page 68, “ — Destina-tion search by Preset destinations” onpage 68 and “ — Destination search by“Address Book”” on page 80.)

Registered areas are avoided at the time ofroute search.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.

2. Select “Navi.”.

On this screen, the following operationscan be performed.

No. Function

1 Sets home(See page 117.)

2 Sets preset destinations(See page 119.)

3 Sets address book(See page 122.)

4 Sets area to avoid(See page 128.)

5 Deletes previous destinations(See page 133.)

6 Detailed navigation settings(See page 329.)

Navigation settings —


117

If home has been registered, that informa-tion can be recalled by using “Go Home”on the “Destination” screen. (See “— Des-tination search by Home” on page 68.)


2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Home”.

� Registering home (See page 117.)� Editing home (See page 118.)

� Deleting home (See page 119.)

(a) Registering home1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Home” on the “NavigationSettings” screen.

4. Select “Set Home”.

5. Enter the location in the same wayas for a destination search. (See “Des-tination search” on page 66.)

— Setting up the “Home”


118

When registration of home is completed,the “Edit Home” screen will be displayed.

6. Select “OK”.

To edit registered information, see “(b)Editing home” on page 118.

(b) Editing home1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.


4. Select “Edit”.

5. Select “Edit” for the item you want tochange.“Name”: To edit home name. The namescan be displayed on the map. (See page126.)

“Location”: To edit location information.(See page 127.)

“Phone #”: To edit telephone numbers.(See page 127.)

“Icon”: To select icons to be displayed onthe map. (See page 125.)

6. Select “OK”.


119

(c) Deleting home1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.



5. To delete home, select “Yes”. Tocancel the deletion, select “No”.

If preset destination has been registered,that information can be recalled by using“Preset Destination” on the “Destination”screen. (See “— Destination search byPreset Destinations” on page 68.)



3. Select “Preset Destinations”.

� Registering preset destination (Seepage 120.)

� Editing preset destination (See page121.)

� Deleting preset destination (Seepage 122.)

— Setting up the “PresetDestinations”


120

(a) Registering preset destinations1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Preset Destinations” on the“Navigation Settings” screen.

4. Select “Set”.


6. Select a position for this preset des-tination.

When registration of preset destination iscompleted, the “Edit Preset Destination”screen will be displayed.

7. Select “OK”.To edit registered information, see “(b)Editing preset destinations” on page 121.


121

(b) Editing preset destinations1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.



5. Select the button of the desired pre-set destination.

6. Select “Edit” for the item you want tochange.

“Name”: To edit preset destination names.The names can be displayed on the map. (See page 126.)




7. Select “OK”.


122

(c) Deleting preset destinations1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.



5. Select the preset destination fordeletion.“Select All”: To select all preset destina-tions on the list.

“Unselect All”: To unselect all of the se-lected preset destinations.

6. Select “Delete”.7. To delete preset destination, select“Yes”. To cancel the deletion, select“No”.

Points or areas on the map can be regis-tered.



3. Select “Address Book”.

� Registering address book entries(See page 123.)

� Editing address book entries (Seepage 124.)

� Deleting address book entries (Seepage 128.)

— Setting up the “AddressBook”


123

(a) Registering address book entries1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Address Book” on the “Nav-igation Settings” screen.

4. Select “New”.


After the address book entry has been reg-istered, the “Edit Address Book Entry”screen will be displayed.

6. Select “OK”.

To edit registered information, see “(b)Editing address book entries” on page124.

INFORMATIONUp to 100 address book entries canbe registered.


124

(b) Editing address book entriesThe icon, name, location and/or telephonenumber of a registered address book entrycan be edited.


2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.3. Select “Address Book” on the “Nav-igation Settings” screen.


5. Select the button of the desired ad-dress book entry.


“Name”: To edit address book entrynames. The names can be displayed onthe map. (See page 126.)




7. Select “OK”.


125

� To change “Icon”

1. Select “Edit” of “Icon”.

2. Select the desired icon.

Change pages by selecting “Page 1”,“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

SOUND ICONSYou can set a sound for some addressbook entries. When the vehicle ap-proaches the location of the address bookentry, the selected sound will be heard.

1. Select “With Sound” on the “Ad-dress Book Entry Icon” screen.

2. Select the desired sound icon.

The next screen appears when “Bell (withDirection)” is selected.

Select either or to adjust the

direction. Select “OK”.

The bell sounds only when the vehicle ap-proaches this point in the direction that hasbeen set.


126

� To change “Name”

1. Select “Edit” of “Name”.

2. Enter the name using the alphanu-meric keys.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

3. Select “OK”.

The previous screen will be displayed.

DISPLAYING MEMORY POINT NAMESThe name of an address book entry can beset to display on the map.

To show the name, select “On” on the“Edit Address Book Entry” screen. Tonot show it, select “Off”.


127

� To change “Location”

1. Select “Edit” of “Location”.

2. Select one of the 8 directional but-tons to move the cursor to the de-sired point on the map.

3. Select “OK”.


� To change “Phone #” (telephonenumber)

1. Select “Edit” of “Phone #”.

2. Enter the number using numberkeys.

3. Select “OK”.



128

(c) Deleting address book entries1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Address Book” on the “Nav-igation Settings” screen.


5. Select the button to be deleted.

“Select All”: To select all addresses in theaddress book.

“Unselect All”: To unselect all of the se-lected addresses.


7. To delete the address book entry, se-lect “Yes”. To cancel the deletion, se-lect “No”.

Areas you want to avoid because of trafficjams, construction work or other reasonscan be registered as areas to avoid.



3. Select “Areas to Avoid”.

� Registering areas to avoid (Seepage 129.)

� Editing areas to avoid (See page130.)

� Deleting areas to avoid (See page133.)

— Setting up the “Areas toAvoid”


129

(a) Registering areas to avoid1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Areas to Avoid” on the “Nav-igation Settings” screen.

4. Select “New”.

5. Enter the location in the same wayas for a destination search, or displaythe map of the area to be avoided. (See“Destination search” on page 66.)

6. Scroll the map to the desired point.

“Adjust Location”: To adjust the positionin smaller increments.

7. Select “Enter”.

8. Select either or to

change the size of the area to beavoided.

9. Select “OK”.

INFORMATION� If a destination is input in the area

to avoid or the route calculationcannot be made without runningthrough the area to avoid, a routepassing through the area to beavoided may be shown.

� Up to 10 locations can be regis-tered as points/areas to avoid.


130

(b) Editing area to avoidThe name, location and/or area size of aregistered area can be edited.





5. Select the desired area button.


“Name”: To edit the name of the area toavoid. The names can be displayed on themap. (See page 131.)

“Location”: To edit area location. (Seepage 132.)

“Size”: To edit area size. (See page 132.)

“Active”: To turn on or off the area to avoidfeature. To turn on the feature select “On”on the “Edit Area to Avoid” screen. To turnoff the feature select “Off” on the “EditArea to Avoid” screen.

7. Select “OK”.


131

� To change “Name”

1. Select “Edit” of “Name”.

2. Enter the name using alphanumerickeys.

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

3. Select “OK”.


DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS TO BEAVOIDED

The name of an area to be avoided thatmay be displayed on the map can be set.

To show the name, select “On” on the“Area to Avoid” screen. To not show it,select “Off”.


132

� To change “Location”


2. Select the 8 directional button tomove the cursor to the desired pointon the map.

3. Select “OK”.


� To change “Size”

1. Select “Edit” of “Size”.

2. Select either or to

change the size of the area to beavoided.

3. Select “OK”.



133

(c) Deleting areas to avoid1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.



5. Select the button to be deleted.

“Select All”: To select all registered areasto avoid in the system.

“Unselect All”: To unselect all registeredareas to avoid in the system.


7. To delete the area, select “Yes”. Tocancel the deletion, select “No”.

The previous destination can be deleted.



3. Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.

4. Select the button you want to delete.

“Select All”: To select all previous des-tinations in the system.

“Unselect All”: To unselect all previousdestinations in the system.


— Deleting previousdestinations


134

6. To delete the destination, select“Yes”. To cancel the deletion, select“No”.

SECTION 5

TELEPHONE AND INFORMATION

135


Telephone and information

� Telephone (Hands−free system for cellular phone) 136. . . . . . Enter a Bluetooth� phone 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call on the Bluetooth� phone 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive on the Bluetooth� phone 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk on the Bluetooth� phone 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Fuel consumption 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Past record 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumption 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Calendar 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� XM� NavWeather 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


136

Hands−free system allows you to makeor receive a call without taking yourhands off the steering wheel by con-necting your cellular phone.

This system supports Bluetooth�.Bluetooth� is a wireless data system bywhich you can call without your cellularphone being connected with a cable orplaced on a cradle.

If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth�, this system can not function.

The operating procedure of the phone isexplained here.

For registering and setting of the phone,see “Telephone settings” on page 338.

CAUTIONWhile driving, do not use a cellularphone or connect the Bluetooth�phone.

NOTICE

Do not leave your cellular phone inthe car. The temperature indoor maybe high and damage the phone.

INFORMATION� In the following conditions, the sys-

tem may not function.� The cellular phone is turned off.

� The current position is outsidethe communication area.

� The cellular phone is not connec-ted.

� The cellular phone has a low bat-tery.

� Even if your cellular phone sup-ports both hands−free and audioBluetooth� connections, it maynot be able to connect to thehands−free connection at the

same time.

� When using Bluetooth� audio andhands−free at the same time, the

following problems may occur.

� The Bluetooth� connection maybe cut.

� Noise may be heard on theBluetooth� audio playback.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

Telephone(Hands−free system forcellular phone)


137

INFORMATIONThis system supports the followingservice.

� Bluetooth� SpecificationVer.1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver.2.0+EDR orhigher)

� Profiles

� HFP (Hands Free Profile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or high-er)

� OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1

� PBAP (Phone Book Access Pro-file) Ver.1.0

If your cellular phone does notsupport HFP, you cannot enter theBluetooth� phone, and take OPP orPBAP service individually.

Please go to “http://www.lexus.com/”to find approved Bluetooth� phonesfor this system.

By pushing the telephone switch above,you can receive a call or hang up withouttaking your hands off the steering wheel.

� Microphone

You can use the microphone abovewhen talking on the phone.

The other party’s voice outputs from thefront speaker. When the received calls orreceived voice outputs, the audio from theaudio system or voice guidance from thenavigation system will be muted.


138

INFORMATION� Talk alternately with the other party

on the phone. If you talk at thesame time, the voice may notreach each other. (It is not a mal-

function.)

� Keep call volume down. Otherwise,the other party’s voice may be au-dible outside the vehicle andvoice echo may increase. Whenyou talk on the phone, speakclearly towards the microphone.

� In the following situations, yourvoice may not reach the other

party.

� Driving on unpaved road. (Mak-ing a traffic noise.)

� Driving at the high speed.

� The window is open.

� Turning the air−conditioningvents towards the microphone.

� The sound of the air−condition-ing fan is loud.

� There is an effect from the net-work of the cellular phone.

1 Indicates the condition ofBluetooth� connection.

“Blue” indicates an excellent connectionto Bluetooth�.

“Yellow” indicates a bad connection toBluetooth�, resulting in possible deteriora-tion of voice quality.

: No connection to Bluetooth�.

2 Indicates the amount of batterycharge left.

Empty Full

This is not displayed when the Bluetooth�is not connected.

The amount left does not always corre-spond with the one of your cellular phone.The amount of battery charge left may notbe displayed depending on the phone youhave. This system doesn’t have a charg-ing function.3 Indicates the receiving area.

“Rm” is displayed when receiving inRoaming area.

“Hm” is displayed when receiving inHome area.

The receiving area may not be displayeddepending on the phone you have.


139

4 Indicates the level of reception.

Poor Excellent

The level of reception does not always cor-respond with the one of your cellularphone.

The level of reception may not be dis-played depending on the phone you have.

When you are out of the service area or ina place inaccessible by radio waves, “NoService” is displayed.

An antenna for the Bluetooth� connec-tion is built in the instrument panel. Theindication of the Bluetooth� connectionmay turn yellow and the system maynot function when you use the Blue-tooth� phone in the following condi-tions and places.

� Your cellular phone is hiding behind thedisplay (behind the seat or in the

glove box and console box).

� Your cellular phone touches or iscovered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth� phone on the placewhere “Blue” indication is displayed.

About the phonebook in this systemThe following data is stored for every regis-tered phone. When another phone is con-necting, you cannot read the registereddata.

� Phonebook data

� Voice tag

� All of call history

� Speed dial

When you delete the phone, theabove−mentioned data is also deleted.

When you release your car:

A lot of personal data is registeredwhen you use the Hands−free system.When you release your car, initializeyour data. (See “� Delete personaldata” on page 322.)

If you initialize it, the former state will nevercome back again. Pay much attentionwhen initializing the data.

You can initialize the following data in thesystem.

� Phonebook data

� Call history data

� Speed dial data

� Voice tag data

� Bluetooth� phone data

� Volume setting

� Details setting


140

FCC ID : AJDK021IC : 775E−K021 Canada 310

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS−Gen of IC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions : (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

CAUTIONFCC WARNING: Changes or modifi-cations not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radi-ation ExposureThis equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth foruncontrolled equipment and meetsthe FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-sure Guidelines in Supplement C toOET65. This equipment has very lowlevels of RF energy that it deemed tocomply without maximum permis-sive exposure evaluation (MPE). Butit is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiatorand person’s body (excluding ex-tremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).

Co−location: This transmitter mustnot be co−located or operated in con-junction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

To use the hands−free system, youneed to enter your phone into the sys-tem. Once you have registered it, youcan make a hands−free call.

If you haven’t yet registered anyBluetooth� phones, you must first registeryour phone according to the followingprocedure.

Please see “� Registering a Bluetooth�phone” on page 340 of additional registra-tion when registering.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.

2. Select “Phone”.

— Enter a Bluetooth� phone


141

3. Select “Yes” to connect your phone.

4. When this screen is displayed, inputthe passcode displayed on the screeninto the phone.For the operation of the phone, see themanual that comes with your cellularphone.

If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.

5. When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.

You do not need to enter the phone in caseof using the same one.

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.


142

� Connecting a Bluetooth� phoneAUTOMATICALLY

When you register your phone, autoconnection will be turned on. Alwaysset it to this mode and leave theBluetooth� phone in a condition whereconnection can be established.

When the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON mode, a nearby cellular phone youhave registered is searched for.

Next, the system automatically con-nects with the latest of the phones con-nected to in the past.Then, the connection result is dis-played.

This screen appears when the Bluetooth�phone is first connected after the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch is in ACCESSORYor IGNITION ON mode.

INFORMATIONIt may take time, the phone connec-tion is carried out during Bluetooth�audio play.


143

MANUALLYWhen the auto connection has failed or“Handsfree power” is turned off, youhave to connect Bluetooth� manually.



3. Select “Connect Phone”.

4. Select “Handsfree Power”, or selectthe phone to connect.

5. The “Connect Bluetooth*” screen isdisplayed.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

6. When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.

Now you can use the Bluetooth� phone.


144

When you connect the phone whileBluetooth� audio is playing

This screen is displayed, and theBluetooth� audio will stop temporarily.

� Reconnecting the Bluetooth�phone

If the Bluetooth� phone isdisconnected with a poor receptionfrom the Bluetooth� network when the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is inACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,the system automatically reconnectsthe Bluetooth� phone. In this case, theconnection result is not displayed.

If the Bluetooth� is disconnected on pur-pose such as you turned your cellularphone off, this does not happen. Recon-nect it by the following methods.

� Select the Bluetooth� phone again.

� Enter the Bluetooth� phone.


145

After you enter the Bluetooth� phone,you can call by using hands−free sys-tem. You can call using the 6 methodsdescribed below.

� By dial

You can call by inputting the phonenumber.

This cannot be operated while driving.


You can also push of the steeringwheel to display the “Phone” screen.


3. Select the desired key to input thephone number.

Each time you select , an inputted

digit is deleted.

When you select “Redial”, the numberyou called last is inputted.

Select or push of the steering

wheel.

— Call on the Bluetooth�phone


146

� By phonebookYou can call by phonebook data whichis transferred from your cellular phone.The system has one phonebook foreach telephone. You can register up to1000 numbers in total of phonebooks.


1. Select “Contacts”.

2. Select the desired data from the list.

3. Select the desired number from thelist.


wheel.


147

When the phonebook is empty

1. Select “Contacts”.

2. Select “Yes” if you want to transfernew contacts from a cellular phone.

Select “No” if you want to edit thephonebook.

� By speed dialYou can call using registered phonenumbers which can be selected from aphonebook. (See “� Registering thespeed dial” on page 358 for registeringthe speed dial.)

This can be done while driving.

1. Select “Speed Dials”.

2. Select the desired number to call.

You can change the page by selecting“Speed Dial 2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.


148

� By call historyYou can call by call history which has 4functions below.All: all the numbers above which

were memorized

Missed: calls which you missed

Incoming: calls which you received

Outgoing: numbers which you called

You can call using the latest 5 call historyitems shown by “All” while driving.

1. Select “Call History”.

2. Select the desired data from the list.

When the list is switched, select “All”,“Missed”, “Incoming” or “Outgoing” tab.

3. Select or push of the steer-

ing wheel.


149

You can call using the latest call historyitem.

1. Push of the steering wheel to dis-play the “Phone” screen.

2. Push of the steering wheel to dis-play the “Call History” screen.

3. Push of the steering wheel to se-lect the latest history item.

4. Select or push of the steer-

ing wheel to call the latest history item.

� When you call by phonebook, thename (if registered) is displayed.

� When you call the same numbercontinuously, only the newest

number is registered.

� When a phone number registered inthe phonebook is received, the

name and the number are displayed.

� Unnoticed phone number such as apublic phone is not memorized in

the system.

� A international phone call may not bemade depending on the cellular

phone which you have.

� By voice recognition

You can call by giving a command. (Forthe operation and command of voicerecognition, see “Speech commandsystem” on page 49.)

This can be operated while driving.

The “Dial by Name” operating procedure isexplained here.

Other operating procedures are also simi-lar.


150

DIALING BY NAMEYou can call by giving a voice tag regis-tered in the phonebook. For setting thevoice recognition, see “—Setting thevoice tag” on page 365.When you select “English” of “Language”,you can call by giving a name registered inthe phonebook.

For setting the voice recognition, see “�Registering the phonebook data” on page351.

Example: Call MIKE.

You: Push the talk switch.

System: “After the beep, please say a command.” “Such as “Go Home”, “Destination”,

“Phone”,“Audio”, “Information” or “Com

mand List”.”“(beep)”

You: “Phone.”

System: “Phone.” “Say a command.” “Such as“Dial by Number”, “Dial by Name”, “Redial”, “Call Back” or “Connect Phone”.” “(beep)”

You: “Dial by Name.”

System: “Dial by Name.” “Say a namefrom your contact list.” “(beep)”


151

You: “MIKE.”

System: “MIKE.” “Say the type of number.” “Such as “Mobile”, “Home”, “Work” or “Other”.” “(beep)”

You: “Home.”

System: “MIKE.” “Home.”“Push the off−hook switch todial or say “Dial”.”“(beep)”

You: “Dial.”

System: “Dial.”

Now, you can call MIKE.

Calling without the voice recognition

After the entry number is displayed, youcan also call by pushing of the steeringwheel or selecting “Dial”.

Cancelling the voice recognition

The voice recognition will be cancelledwhen you do the following.

� Keep on pushing the talk switch.

� Push of the steering wheel.

� Select “Cancel”. (Except for recogniz-ing the command.)

� Say “Cancel”.

� By POI* call

You can call by selecting when it is

displayed on the screen from naviga-tion system. (See “POI INFORMATION”on page 41 for details.)*: Point of Interest


152

When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound. Select or

push of the steering wheel to talk onthe phone.To refuse to receive the call:

Select or push of the steeringwheel.

To adjust the volume of received call:Select “–” or “+” or use the volumeswitch of the steering wheel.

On the international phone call, the otherparty’s name may not be displayed cor-rectly depending on the cellular phonewhich you have.

While you are talking on the phone, thisscreen is displayed. You can do the op-eration below on the screen.

To adjust the volume of the other party’svoice:

Select “–” or “+” or use the volumeswitch of the steering wheel.

To hang up the phone:


To mute your voice:Select “Mute”.

To input a Key:Select “0−9”.

To transfer the call:Select “Call Transfer”.

You cannot change from Hands−free callto cellular phone call while driving.

When you change from cellular phone callto Hands−free call, the Hands−free screenwill be displayed and you can operate it onthe screen.

Transferring method and behavior are dif-ferent depending on the cellular phonewhich you have.

For the operation of the phone, see themanual that comes with your cellularphone.

— Receive on theBluetooth� phone

— Talk on the Bluetooth�phone


153

When you select “0−9”

Select the desired number to input thekey.




If the continuous tone signal is regis-tered in a phonebook, this screen ap-pears. (If not registered, “Send” and“Exit” are not displayed.)

Confirm the number displayed on thescreen and select “Send”. The numberbefore marked sign will be sent.

When you select “Exit”, this function willbe finished and normal tone screen ap-pears.



The continuous tone signal is the markedsign (p or w) and the number followingphone number. (ex. 056133w0123p#1�)

You can do this operation when you wantto operate an answering machine or use atelephone service in bank for example.You can register the phone number andthe code number in the phonebook.


154


You can operate “Mute” and “SendTones” by giving a command during acall.The operating procedure is similar to othervoice recognition. (For the operation ofvoice recognition, see “Speech commandsystem” on page 49.)

� Interrupt call

When the call is interrupted by the thirdparty while talking, this screen is dis-played.


wheel to start talking with the other party.

Select or push of the steeringwheel to refuse the call.


155

Everytime you select or push of

the steering wheel while interrupt call, theother party will be switched.

If your cellular phone is not accepted forHFP Ver. 1.5, this function can not be used.

INFORMATIONInterrupt call operation may differdepending on your phone companyand cellular phone.

Fuel consumption information from recentresets will be displayed.


2. Select “Fuel Consumption”.

Fuel consumption —— Past record


156

If the “Past record” screen does not ap-pear, select “Past record”.

“Past record” screen will be displayed.1 Fuel economy since the last reset2 Current fuel economy3 Best recorded fuel economy

The average fuel consumption history isdivided by color into past averages and theaverage fuel consumption since the lastreset.

Reset the average fuel consumption tomeasure the current fuel consumptionagain. For more information on resettingfuel consumption, see the vehicle owner’smanual.

Past record data can be deleted by select-ing “Clear”.

The average fuel consumption of the last30 minutes will be shown in one−minuteblocks.


2. Select “Fuel Consumption” onthe“Information” screen.

If the “Consumption” screen does not ap-pear, select “Consumption”.

— Consumption


157

“Consumption” screen will be displayed.1 Fuel consumption in the past 30 min-

utes2 Cruising range

Average fuel consumption is divided bycolor into past averages and averages at-tained since the “ENGINE START STOP”switch was last turned to IGNITION ONmode.

Consumption data can be deleted by se-lecting “Clear”.

To view calendar.


2. Select “Calendar”.

On this screen, the current date is high-lighted in yellow.

or : To change month.

or : To change year.

“Today”: To display the current month cal-endar (if another month will be displayed).

Calendar


158

The XM� NavWeather service that allowsthe navigation system to display weatherinformation on the map is available if yoursatellite radio tuner can receive weatherinformation.

To receive the XM� NavWeather service,a subscription to the XM� Satellite Radiowith NavWeather is necessary.

The XM� NavWeather is available in thecontiguous 48 U.S. states. For detailsabout the XM� NavWeather service cover-age area, refer to www.xmradio.com.

� How to activate the XM� NavWeatherservice

To receive the XM� NavWeather ser-vice, it is necessary to activate the ser-vice. To activate the service, an extrafee is required in addition to subscrip-tion fees for the XM� Satellite Radio.For details about service an activation,call XM� Listener Care Center at1−877−515−3987.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by select-ing ”channel 000” on the radio. For details,see ”(b) Displaying the radio ID” on page181.

XM� Satellite Radio has the responsibilityfor all fees and service, they are subject tochange.

The following operations can be per-formed.

� Show XM� NavWeather informationWeather forecast information is displayedon the map. (See page 159.)

� Weather informationWeather information for the selected city isdisplayed. (See page 161.)

� Weather warningsWeather warnings issued within a 62 mile(100 km) diameter (approximately) aroundthe vehicle are displayed on the warningscreen. (See page 161.)

XM� NavWeather


159

� Show XM� NavWeather information


2. Select “XM NavWeather”.

XM� NavWeather screen is displayed onthe screen.

XM� NavWeather SCREEN

1 “Info.” buttonWhen the city icon button is selected, the“Info.” button will be displayed on thescreen. Selecting this button displays the“Forecast” screen. (See page 161.)2 City icon

When this button is selected, city namesand the “Info.” button will be displayed onthe upper part of the screen.3 “Forecast” button

When this button is selected, the city selec-tion screen will be displayed.

Select a city to display weather informa-tion. Weather information of the selectedcity will be displayed. (See page 161.)4 “Current Location” button

When the “Current Location” button isselected, a map of the vehicle’s currentlocation will be displayed.


160

5 Zoom in/out buttonThe scale of the map can be changed.Three zoom levels can be selected; 16miles (26 km), 32 miles (50 km) and 64miles (100 km).6 Weather icons and grids

Inclement weather information is dis-played on the map using weather iconsand grids. Selecting an icon shows the re-lated information at the top of the screen.

Icon Weather

Tornado

Hurricane

Storm

Flood

Winter

Wind

Extremes

Other

Hail storm

Shear storm

Heavy fog

Heavy freezing rain/ice

Icon Weather

Heavy snow

Heavy rain


161

� Weather information

1 Received time2 City name3 Today’s date4 Current weather5 Current temperature6 Today’s weather7 Tomorrow’s weather8 Day after tomorrow’s weather9 Observed time

10 Specified day’s weatherWhen this button is selected, weather in-formation for a specified day will be dis-played.

1 Daytime weather2 Nighttime weather3 Maximum temperature4 Minimum temperature5 Precipitation probability

� Weather warningsWeather warnings issued within a 62 mile(100 km) diameter (approximately) aroundthe vehicle are displayed on the warningscreen.

“Show Map”: When this button is se-lected, the XM� NavWeather screen willbe displayed.

“OK”: When this button is selected, thescreen will return to the map of the currentlocation.

When the vehicle approaches the edge ofthe 15.5 mile (25 km) radius of the currentweather−warning zone, the warningscreen will be displayed again.


162

� XM� NavWeather indicator

When XM� NavWeather information hasbeen received, the XM� NavWeather indi-cator will appear on the screen.

While weather warnings are being re-ceived the indicator will be lit up in orange.

SECTION 6

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

163

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

Audio/video system

� Quick reference 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Using your audio/video system 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Some basics 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio operation 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD changer operation 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD changer operation 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth� audio operation 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB memory player/iPod� player operation 235. . . . . . . . . . . .

� Audio/video remote controls 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Rear seat entertainment system features 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the radio 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DVD player 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing an audio CD/CD text 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing WMA/MP3 discs 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing DVD video/audio 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the video mode 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing other settings 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Audio/video system operating hints 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

164

Operations such as selecting a preset station and adjusting the sound balance are car-ried out on the screen. To display the audio screen, push the “MENU” button and select“Audio”.

�DVD changer

�If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logois shown on the panel.

1 Function menu tabTo control the radio, DVD changer,Bluetooth� audio player, AUX, USBmemory player or iPod� player selectthe screen tabs. For details, seepage 170.

2 Function menu display screenTo control the radio, DVD changer,Bluetooth� audio player, AUX, USBmemory player or iPod� player selectthe screen buttons. For details, seepage 170.

3 Disc slotInsert discs into the slot after pushing“LOAD” button. For details, seepage 202.

4 “LOAD” buttonPush this button to insert the discs.For details, see page 202.

5 “TUNE·FILE” knobTurn this knob to move the stationband and files up or down. For de-tails, see pages 182, 197 and 240.

Quick reference

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

165

6 “SCAN” buttonPush this button to scan radio sta-tions or scan the files or tracks. Fordetails, see pages 178, 183, 194, 199and 241.

7 “CH·DISC” buttonPush the “�” or “�” button to selecta preset turning or a selected disc.For details, see pages 177, 183 and204.

8 “AUX·USB” buttonPush this button to turn theBluetooth� audio player, AUX, USBmemory player or iPod� player on.For details, see pages 170, 176, 227and 235.

9 “DISC” buttonPush this button to turn the DVDchanger on. For details, see pages170 and 201.

10 “SAT” buttonPush this button to choose an SATstation. For details, see pages 170and 181.

11 “SEEK·TRACK” buttonPush either side of this button to seekup or down for a station, or to accessa desired track, file or chapter. Fordetails, see pages 178, 183, 193,197, 213, 224, 233 and 239.

12 “AM·FM” buttonPush this button to choose a radiostation. (AM, FM1, FM2) For details, see pages 170 and 176.

13 “PWR·VOL” knobPush this knob to turn the audio sys-tem on and off, and turn it to adjust thevolume. For details, see page 169.

14 “ ” buttonPush this button to eject the discs.For details, see page 204.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

166

�CD changer

1 Function menu tabTo control the radio, CD changer,Bluetooth� audio player, AUX, USBmemory player or iPod� player selectthe screen tabs. For details, seepage 170.

2 Function menu display screenTo control the radio, CD changer,Bluetooth� audio player or AUX, se-lect the screen buttons. For details,see page 170.

3 Disc slotInsert discs into the slot after pushing“LOAD” button. For details, seepage 187.

4 “LOAD” buttonPush this button to insert the discs.For details, see page 187.

5 “TUNE·FILE” knobTurn this knob to move the stationband and files up or down. For de-tails, see pages 182, 197 and 240.

6 “SCAN” buttonPush this button to scan radio sta-tions or scan the files or tracks. Fordetails, see pages 178, 183, 194, 199and 241.

7 “CH·DISC” buttonPush the “�” or “�” button to selecta preset turning or a selected disc.For details, see pages 177, 183 and189.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

167

8 “AUX·USB” buttonPush this button to turn theBluetooth� audio player, AUX, USBmemory player or iPod� player on.For details, see pages 170, 176, 227and 235.

9 “CD” buttonPush this button to turn the CDchanger on. For details, see pages170 and 187.

10 “SAT” buttonPush this button to choose an SATstation. For details, see pages 170and 181.

11 “SEEK·TRACK” buttonPush either side of this button to seekup or down for a station, or to accessa desired track, file or chapter. Fordetails, see pages 178, 183, 193,197, 233 and 239.

12 “AM·FM” buttonPush this button to choose a radiostation. (AM, FM1, FM2) For details, see pages 170 and 176.

13 “PWR·VOL” knobPush this knob to turn the audio sys-tem on and off, and turn it to adjust thevolume. For details, see page 169.

14 “ ” buttonPush this button to eject the discs.For details, see page 189.

This section describes some of the basicfeatures of your audio/video system.Some information may not pertain to yoursystem.

Your audio/video system works when the“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turnedto ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.



Using your audio/videosystem — — Some basics

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

168


CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radi-ation ExposureThis equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth foruncontrolled equipment and meetsthe FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-sure Guidelines in Supplement C toOET65. This equipment has very lowlevels of RF energy that it deemed tocomply without maximum permis-sive exposure evaluation (MPE). Butit is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiatorand person’s body (excluding ex-tremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).Co−location: This transmitter mustnot be co−located or operated in con-junction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

� Laser products� Do not take this unit apart or at-

tempt to make any changesyourself. This is an intricate unitthat uses a laser pickup to re-trieve information from the sur-face of compact discs. The la-ser is carefully shielded so thatits rays remain inside the cabi-net. Therefore, never try to dis-assemble the player or alter anyof its parts since you may be ex-posed to laser rays and danger-ous voltages.

� This product utilizes a laser.Use of controls or adjustmentsor performance of proceduresother than those specified here-in may result in hazardous radi-ation exposure.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the audio/videosystem on longer than necessarywhen the engine is not running.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

169

(a) Speech command system

By pushing the switch above, you canoperate the speech command system.For the operation of the speech commandsystem and the list of commands, seepages 49 and 54.

(b) Turning the system on and off

“PWR·VOL”: Push this knob to turn theaudio system on and off. Turn this knob toadjust the volume. The system turns on inthe last mode used.

You can select the function that enablesautomatic return to the previous screenfrom the audio screen. See page 317 fordetails.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

170

(c) Switching between functions

� DVD changer image

Push the “AM·FM”, “SAT”, “DISC”,“CD” or “AUX·USB” button to turn onthe desired mode.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Audio”.

2. Select “AM”, ”FM”, “SAT”, “CD”,“CD/DVD”, “BT”, “AUX” or “USB” tabto turn on the desired mode.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

171

Push these buttons or tabs if you want toswitch from one mode to another.

If the disc is not set, the CD changer/DVDchanger does not turn on.

You can turn off the CD changer/DVDchanger by ejecting all the discs. If the au-dio system was previously off, then the en-tire audio system will be turned off whenyou eject all the discs.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

172

The screen buttons for radio, CDchanger, DVD changer, Bluetooth� au-dio player, AUX, USB memory playerand iPod� player operation are dis-played on the screen when the audiocontrol mode is selected.Select the tab to select the desired modewhen the audio control mode is selected.

INFORMATIONYou cannot operate dimmed screenbuttons.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

173

(d) DSP control1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Audio”.

2. Select “Sound” to display the soundadjustment screen.

3. Select “DSP” tab to display thisscreen.4. Select the desired button.Surround function (if equipped):Select “On” of “Surround” and select“OK”.The surround function will turn on.

Automatic sound levelizer (ASL) (ifequipped):When the audio sound becomes difficult tohear due to road noise, wind noise or othernoises while driving, select “On”. The sys-tem adjusts to the optimum volume andtone quality according to the speed of car,wind noise or other noise.

(e) Tone and balanceToneHow good an audio program sounds to youis largely determined by the mix of thetreble, mid and bass levels. In fact, differ-ent kinds of music and vocal programsusually sound better with different mixes oftreble, mid and bass.

BalanceA good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to astereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

174

1. Select “Sound” tab to display thisscreen.2. Select the desired button.“Treble” “+” or “–”: Adjust high−pitchedtones.

“Mid” “+” or “–”: Adjust mid−pitchedtones.

“Bass” “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitchedtones.

“Front” or “Rear”: Adjusts sound bal-ance between the front and rear speakers.

“L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance be-tween the left and right speakers.

3. Select “OK”.The tone of each mode (for such as AM,FM, CD changer and DVD changer) canbe adjusted.

(f) Selecting screen size (DVD chan-ger only)Before selecting screen size, it is neces-sary to insert a DVD disc and select DVDmode.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Audio”.2. Select “CD/DVD” tab.

3. Select “Settings”.

4. Select “Wide”.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

175

5. Select the desired button.“Normal”: Displays a 3 : 4 screen, with

either side in black.“Wide 1”: Widens the 3 : 4 screen hori-

zontally to fill the screen.“Wide 2”: Widens the 3 : 4 screen ver-

tically and horizontally, in the same ratio, to fill thescreen.

When you select , the previousscreen returns.

6. Select “OK”.

(g) Your CD or DVD changerWhen you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in with thelabel side up. This CD or DVD changercan store up to six discs.

The changer is intended for use with 4.7 in.(12 cm) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for inser-tion, or it will cause damage to thechanger. Insert only one disc intothe slot at a time.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the changer. Do not insertanything other than a disc into theslot.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

176

(h) AUX adapterThe sound of portable audio playersconnected to the AUX adapter can beenjoyed. Push the “AUX” button todisplay audio screen and select “AUX”tab to switch to AUX mode. When theportable audio player is not connected tothe AUX adapter, the tab will tone down.For details, refer to the “Owner’s Manual”.

(a) Listening to the radio

Push the “AM·FM” button to display au-dio screen and select “AM” or “FM”tabs to choose either an AM or FM sta-tion.“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on thescreen.

If your vehicle is equipped with a satelliteradio broadcast system, when you pushthe “SAT” button or select “SAT” tab onaudio screen, “SAT1”, “SAT2”, “SAT3”station appears on the display. For detailsabout satellite radio broadcast, see“—Radio operation (XM� Satellite Radiobroadcast)” on page 181.

— Radio operation

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

177

Turn the knob clockwise to step up thestation band or counterclockwise tostep down.Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the screen. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to pre-vent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion. In this case, “ST” disappears from thescreen.

(b) Presetting a station

1. Tune in the desired station.2. Select one of the buttons (1 — 6) youwant and hold it until a beep is heard.This sets the station to the button andthe frequency appears on the button.Each radio mode (AM, FM1 or FM2) canstore up to 6 stations. To change the pre-set station to a different one, follow thesame procedure.

The preset station memory is cancelledwhen the power source is interrupted bybattery disconnection or a blown fuse.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

178

(c) Selecting a stationTune in the desired station using one of thefollowing methods.

Preset tuning: Select the button (1 — 6)for the station you want. The button ishighlighted and the station frequency ap-pears on the screen.

Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK·TRACK”button on either side. The radio will beginseeking up or down for a station of thenearest frequency and will stop on recep-tion. Each time you push the button, thestations will be searched automaticallyone after another.

To scan all the frequencies: Push the“SCAN” button or select “SCAN” on thescreen briefly. “SCAN” appears on thescreen. The radio will find the next stationand stay there for a few seconds, and thenscan again. To select a station, Push the“SCAN” button or select “SCAN” again.

To scan the preset stations: Push the“SCAN” button or select “SCAN” on thescreen for longer than a second. “P.SCAN” appears on the screen. The radiowill tune in the next preset station, staythere for a few seconds, and then move tothe next preset station. To select a station,push the “SCAN” button or select“SCAN” again.

(d) Radio Data SystemYour audio system is equipped with RadioData Systems (RDS). RDS mode pro-vides you to receive text messages fromradio stations that utilize RDS transmit-ters.

When RDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particular pro-gram type,— display messages from radio stations,— search for a stronger signal station.

RDS features are available for use only onFM stations which broadcast RDS infor-mation.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

179

“Type � �”If the system receives no RDS stations,“NO−PTY” appears on the display.

Each time you select “� Type ” or “Type�”, the program type changes as in thefollowing:

� ROCK

� MISC (Miscellaneous)

� INFORM (Information)

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R & B (Rhythm and Blues)

� RELIGION

� ALART (Emergency message)

“TypeSeek”When a program is set, “Type Seek” ap-pears. Select the button and the systemstarts to seek the station in the relevantprogram type.

If any type program station is not found,“Nothing” appears on the display.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

180

“Message”If the system receives a radio text fromRDS station, “MSG” appears on the dis-play. Select “Message”, and a text mes-sage is displayed on the screen. This func-tion is available only when the vehicle isnot moving.

When you select “Message Off”, the dis-play returns.

(e) Traffic announcement

“Traffic”A station that regularly broadcasts trafficinformation is automatically located.

When you select “Traffic”, “Traf. Seek”appears on the display and the radio willstart seeking any traffic program station.

If no traffic program station is found,“Nothing” appears on the display.

If a traffic program station is found, thename for traffic program station is dis-played for a while until a traffic announce-ment is received.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

181

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast inyour vehicle, a subscription to the XM�Satellite Radio service is necessary.

(a) How to subscribe to an XM� Satel-lite Radio

An XM� Satellite Radio is a tuner designedexclusively to receive broadcasts providedunder a separate subscription. Availabilityis limited to the 48 contiguous U.S. statesand some Canadian provinces.

How to subscribe:You must enter into a separate serviceagreement with the XM� Satellite Radio inorder to receive satellite broadcast pro-gramming in the vehicle. Additional activa-tion and service subscription fees applythat are not included in the purchase priceof the vehicle and optional digital satellitetuner.

For complete information on subscriptionrates and terms, or to subscribe to the XM�Satellite Radio.

U.S.A.—Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com orcall 1−877−515−3987.

Canada—Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call1−877−438−9677.

The XM� Satellite Radio is solely responsi-ble for the quality, availability and contentof the satellite radio services provided,which are subject to the terms and condi-tions of the XM� Satellite Radio customerservice agreement.

Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tuningto “channel 000” on the radio. For details,see “(b) Displaying the radio ID” below.

All fees and programming are the respon-sibility of the XM� Satellite Radio and aresubject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice: Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are awardedType Approval Certificates from XM� Sat-ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibilitywith the services offered by the XM� Satel-lite Radio.

(b) Displaying the radio IDEach XM� tuner is identified with a uniqueradio ID. You will need the radio ID whenactivating XM� service or when reportinga problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-phanumeric characters appears. If you se-lect another channel, display of the IDcode is canceled. The channel(000) alter-nates the display between the radio ID andthe specific radio ID code.

—Radio operation(XM� Satellite Radiobroadcast)

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

182

(c) Listening to satellite radio

Push the “SAT” button to display audioscreen and select “SAT” tab to choosea SAT channel.“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appears on thescreen.

Turn this knob to select the next or pre-vious channel.If you turn continuously, you can rapidlyscroll forward or down through the chan-nels.

(d) Channel category

Select either “� Type” or “Type �” to goto the next or previous category.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

183

(e) Presetting a channel1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Select one of the channel selectorbuttons (1 — 6) and hold it until a beepis heard.This sets the channels to the button andthe name and number of the channel ap-pears on the button.

Each button can store three SAT channels.To change the preset channel to a differentone, follow the same procedure.

The preset channel memory is cancelledwhen the power source is interrupted bybattery disconnection or a blown fuse.

(f) Selecting a channelTune in the desired channel using one ofthe following methods.

Preset tuning: Select the channel selec-tor button (1 — 6) for the channel you want.The button (1 — 6) is highlighted and chan-nel number appears on the display.

To select channel within the currentcategory: Push the “�” or “�” button of“SEEK·TRACK”. The radio will step up ordown the channel within the current chan-nel category.

To scan the currently selected channelcategory: Select “SCAN” or push the“SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appearson the display. The radio will find the nextchannel in the same channel category,stay there for a few seconds, and thenscan again. To select a channel, select“SCAN” or push the “SCAN” button asecond time.

To scan the preset channels: Select“SCAN” or push the “SCAN” button andhold it until you hear a beep. “P.SCAN” ap-pears on the display. The radio will find thenext preset channel, stay there for a fewseconds, and then move to the next presetchannel. To select a channel, select“SCAN” or push the “SCAN” button asecond time.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

184

(g) Displaying the title and name

When you select “Text”, the song/pro-gram title and the artist name/feature aredisplayed.

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can bedisplayed. (Some information will not befully displayed.)

When you select “Text” again, the displayreturns.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

185

(h) If the satellite radio tuner malfunctionsWhen problems occur with the XM� tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer-ring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.

ANTENNA

The XM� antenna is not connected. Check whether theXM� antenna cable is attached securely.

A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surroundingantenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for assis-tance.

UNAUTH

You have not subscribed to the XM� Satellite Radio.The radio is being updated with the latest encryptioncode. Contact the XM� Satellite Radio for subscriptioninformation. When a contract is canceled, you canchoose the “CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

The premium channel you selected is not authorized.Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to theprevious channel or “CH001”. If it does not change au-tomatically, select another channel. If you want to listento the premium channel, contact the XM� Satellite Ra-dio.

NO SIGNALThe XM� signal is too weak at the current location. Waituntil your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger sig-nal.

LOADINGThe unit is acquiring audio or program information. Waituntil the unit has received the information.

OFF AIRThe channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-gramming. Select another channel.

−−−−−There is no song/program title or artist name/featureassociated with the channel at that time. No actionneeded.

CHUNAVL

The channel you selected is no longer available. Waitfor about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the pre-vious channel or “CH001”. If it does not change auto-matically, select another channel.

Contact the XM� Listener Care Center at 1−877−515−3987 (U.S.A.) or1−877−438−9677 (Canada).

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

186

NOTICE

This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant toPart 15 of the FCC Rules. These limitsare designed to provide reasonableprotection against harmful interfer-ence in a residential installation. Thisequipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and used in accordancewith the instructions, may causeharmful interference to radio com-munications. However, there is noguarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television re-ception, which can be determined byturning the equipment off and on, theuser is encouraged to try to correctthe interference by one or more of thefollowing measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receivingantenna.

—Increase the separation betweenthe equipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an out-let on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer or an experi-enced radio/TV technician for help.

Information to user

Alternation or modifications carriedout without appropriate authoriza-tion may invalidate the user’s right tooperate the equipment.

INFORMATIONThis XM� tuner supports “AudioServices” (Music and Talk) of onlyXM� Satellite Radio and “TextInformation”∗ linked to the respective“Audio Services”.∗:Text Information includes, StationName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

187

(a) Inserting discsThe “ENGINE START STOP” switch mustbe in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode.

Your CD changer can store up to 6 discs.

You can set a disc at the lowest empty discnumber.

� Setting a single disc:

1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.The orange indicators at both ends of theslot start blinking. After the orange indica-tors change to green and stay on, the CDchanger door will open.

— CD changer operation

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

188

2. Insert only one disc while the CDchanger door is open.You can set a disc at the lowest empty discnumber.

After insertion, the set disc is automaticallyloaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot beplayed. In this case, “Check CD �” ap-pears on the screen.

If you do not insert the disc within 15 sec-onds after pushing the “LOAD” button, abeep will sound and the operation will becanceled automatically.If you need to insert the next disc, repeatthe same procedure to insert another disc.

� Setting all the discs:

1. Push the “LOAD” button until youhear a beep.The orange indicators at both ends of theslot start blinking. After the orange indica-tors change to green and stay on, the CDchanger door will open.

2. Insert only one disc while the CDchanger door is open.The CD changer door closes and theorange indicators start blinking.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

189

3. Insert the next disc after the orangeindicators change to green and stay onand the CD changer door opens.4. Repeat this procedure until you in-sert all the discs.To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD”button briefly.

If you do not insert the discs within 15 sec-onds after pushing the “LOAD” button, thebeep will sound and the operation will becanceled automatically.

NOTICE

Do not insert one disc stacked on topof another one or feed them in contin-uously, to prevent discs from gettingstuck in the changer.

INFORMATIONUnder extremely cold conditions, thedisplay may react slowly.

(b) Ejecting discs� A single disc alone:

1. Push the “ ” or “ ” button of“CH·DISC” or select the disc numberbutton on the “Change Discs” screento highlight the disc number you wantto eject.To display the “Change Discs” screen, se-lect “Change Discs” on each audio con-trol screen.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

190

2. Push the “ ” button for the discbriefly.At this time, the orange indicators of theslot start blinking and the disc is ejected.

3. After the blinking indicators stay on,remove the disc.

� Ejecting all the discs:

1. Push the “ ” button for the discuntil you hear a beep.At this time, the orange indicators of theslot start blinking and a disc is ejected.

2. After the blinking indicators stay on,remove the disc.The indicators start blinking again and thenext disc is ejected.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 sec-onds after it is ejected, the beep will soundand the operation will be canceled auto-matically.

When all the discs are removed, the indi-cators go out.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

191

The numbers of the trays where the disc isnot set are dimmed.

(c) Playing a disc

Push the “CD” button to display audioscreen and select “CD” tab if the discsare already loaded in the changer.The discs set in the changer are playedcontinuously, starting with the last disc youinserted. The disc number of the disc cur-rently being played, the track number andthe time from the beginning of the programappear on the screen.

When play of one disc ends, the first trackof the following disc starts. When play ofthe final disc ends, play of the first discstarts again.

The changer will skip any empty disc trays.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

192

(d) Selecting a desired disc

On the screen:Select “CD” tab and select “ChangeDiscs”The selected disc number is highlighted.

The changer will start playing the selecteddisc from the first track.

On the audio panel:Push the “ ” or “ ” button of“CH·DISC”.When you release the button, the changerwill start playing the selected disc from thefirst track.

(e) Playing an audio disc

Select “CD” tab, then select “ChangeDiscs”. Choose an audio disc numberto display this screen.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

193

SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for directaccess to a desired track.

Push either side of the “SEEK·TRACK”button and repeat it until the desired tracknumber appears on the screen. As you re-lease the button, the changer will startplaying the selected track from the begin-ning.

“Select” for Track: The desired track canbe selected from a list. This function isavailable only when the vehicle is not mov-ing.

Select “Select”. The track list is dis-played.

Select the desired track number. Thechanger will start playing the selectedtrack from the beginning.

: By selecting this button, the list

moves up by 5 track groups. If this buttonis selected when the top page of the list isdisplayed, the last page is displayed.


moves down by 5 track groups. If this but-ton is selected when the last page of the listis displayed, the top page is displayed.

�, �: If � appears to the right of the itemname, the complete name is too long forthe display.

Select � to scroll to the end of the name.Select � to scroll the beginning of thename.

Fast forward: Push “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button and hold it to fastforward the disc. When you release thebutton, the changer will resume playingfrom that position.

Reverse: Push “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button and hold it to re-verse the disc. When you release the but-ton, the changer will resume playing.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

194

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED TRACKOR DISC

Searching for a desired track —Select “SCAN” on the screen or pushthe “SCAN” button briefly while thedisc is playing.“SCAN” appears on the screen. Thechanger will play the next track for 10 sec-onds, then scan again. To select a track,select “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button a second time. If thechanger reaches the end of the disc, it willcontinue scanning at track 1.

After all the tracks are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

Searching for a desired disc —Select “SCAN” on the screen or pushthe “SCAN” button for longer than asecond while the disc is playing.“D.SCAN” appears on the screen. Theprogram at the beginning of each audiodisc will be played for 10 seconds. To con-tinue listening to the program of yourchoice, select “SCAN” on the screen orpush the “SCAN” button a second time.

After all the audio discs are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

195

OTHER FUNCTIONS

“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of thetrack or disc you are currently listening to.

Repeating a track —Select “RPT” briefly while the track isplaying. “RPT” appears on the screen.When the track is finished, the changer willautomatically go back to the beginning ofthe track and play the track again. To can-cel it, select “RPT” once again.

Repeating a disc —Select “RPT” for longer than a secondwhile the disc is playing. “D.RPT” appearson the screen. When the disc is finished,the changer will automatically go back tothe beginning of the disc and play the discagain. To cancel it, select “RPT” onceagain.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and randomselection.

Playing the tracks on one disc in ran-dom order —Select “RAND” briefly while the disc isplaying. “RAND” appears on the screen.The system selects a track on the disc be-ing listened to in random order. To cancelit, select “RAND” once again.

Playing the tracks on all the audio discsin random order —Select “RAND” for longer than a secondwhile the disc is playing. “D.RAND” ap-pears on the screen. The system selectsa track on all the audio discs in the changerin random order. To cancel it, select“RAND” once again.

If a CD−TEXT disc is inserted, the title ofthe disc and track will be displayed. Up to32 letters can be displayed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

196

(f) Playing a MP3/WMA disc

Select “CD” tab, then select “ChangeDiscs”. Choose an MP3/WMA discnumber to display this screen.

SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER

“Folder�”: Select this button to go to thenext folder.

“Folder�”: Select this button to go to theprevious folder.

“Select” for Folder: The desired foldercan be selected in a list. This function isavailable only when the vehicle is not mov-ing.

Select “Select”. The folder list is dis-played.

Select the desired folder number. Thechanger will start playing the first file of theselected folder.


moves up by 5 folder groups. If this buttonis selected when the top page of the list isdisplayed, the last page is displayed.


moves down by 5 folder groups. If this but-ton is selected when the last page of the listis displayed, the top page is displayed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

197

SELECTING A DESIRED FILE

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for directaccess to a desired file.

Push either side of the “SEEK·TRACK”button and repeat it until the desired filenumber appears on the display. As you re-lease the button, the changer will startplaying the selected file from the begin-ning. When “RAND” or “FLD.RPT” is on,the file number within the folder you arecurrently listening to appears.

Fast forward: Push “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button and hold it to fastforward the disc. When you release thebutton, the changer will resume playingfrom that position.

Reverse: Push “�” side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button and hold it to re-verse the disc. When you release the but-ton, the changer will resume playing.

“TUNE·FILE” knob: Use for direct accessto a desired file in the disc.

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob to step up ordown all the files in the disc you are cur-rently listening to. The file number ap-pears on the display. When “RAND” or“FLD.RPT” is on, all the files in the folderyou are currently listening to can bestepped up or down.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

198

“Select” for File: The desired file can beselected in a list. This function is availableonly when the vehicle is not moving.

Select “Select”. The file list is displayed.

Select the desired file number. The chang-er will start playing the selected file fromthe beginning.


moves up by 5 file groups. If this button isselected when the top page of the list isdisplayed, the last page is displayed.


moves down by 5 file groups. If this buttonis selected when the last page of the list isdisplayed, the top page is displayed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

199

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED FILE

Select “SCAN” on the screen or pushthe “SCAN” button briefly while thedisc is playing.“SCAN” appears on the screen. Thechanger will play the next file in the folderfor 10 seconds, then scan again. To selecta file, select “SCAN” on the screen orpush the “SCAN” button a second time.If the changer reaches the end of the fold-er, it will continue scanning from file 1.

After all the files are scanned in one pass,normal play resumes.

SEARCHING FOR A DESIRED FOLDER

Select “SCAN” on the screen or pushthe “SCAN” button for longer than asecond while the disc is playing.“FLD.SCAN” appears on the screen. Theprogram at the beginning of each folder willbe played for 10 seconds. To continue lis-tening to the program of your choice, se-lect “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button a second time.

After all the folders are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

200

OTHER FUNCTIONS

“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of thefile or folder you are currently listening to.

Repeating a file —Select “RPT” briefly while the file is play-ing. “RPT” appears on the screen. Whenthe file is finished, the changer will auto-matically go back to the beginning of thefile and play the file again. To cancel it, se-lect “RPT” once again.

Repeating a folder —Select “RPT” for longer than a secondwhile the folder is playing. “FLD.RPT” ap-pears on the screen. When the folder isfinished, the changer will automatically goback to the beginning of the folder and playthe folder again. To cancel it, select “RPT”once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and randomselection of the folder or the disc which youare currently listening to.

Playing the files in one folder in randomorder —Select “RAND” briefly while the disc isplaying. “RAND” appears on the screen.The system selects a file in the folder youare currently listening to. To cancel it, se-lect “RAND” once again.

Playing the files in all the folders on onedisc in random order —Select “RAND” for longer than a secondwhile the disc is playing. “FLD.RAND” ap-pears on the screen. The system selectsa file in all the folders. To cancel it, select“RAND” once again.

When a file is skipped or the system is in-operative, select “RAND” to reset.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

201

(g) If the changer malfunctionsIf “CD error” appears on the screen, audiosignals of the disc cannot be read or thesystem has trouble. Push the “CD” buttononce again.

If the changer does not operate, check thatthe disc surface is not soiled or damaged.If the disc is O.K., the temperature of thechanger’s internal mechanism may beraised because of high external tempera-ture. Remove the disc from the changer tocool it.

If the changer still does not operate, haveit checked by your dealer.

If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD−DAfiles, only CD−DA files are played. If anMP3/WMA disc contains files other thanCD−DA, only MP3/WMA files are played.

For safety reasons, you can enjoy DVDvideo discs, DVD audio discs and videoCDs only when the vehicle is completelystopped with the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON mode and the parking brake applied.While you are driving, you can hear audioalone even in the DVD video, DVD audioor video CD mode.

— DVD changer operation

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

202

(a) Inserting discsThe “ENGINE START STOP” switch mustbe in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode.

Your DVD changer can store up to 6 discs.

You can set a disc at the lowest empty discnumber.

� Setting a single disc:

1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.The orange indicators at both ends of theslot start blinking. After the orange indica-tors change to green and stay on, the DVDchanger door will open.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

203

2. Insert only one disc while the DVDchanger door is open.You can set a disc at the lowest empty discnumber.

After insertion, the set disc is automaticallyloaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot beplayed. In this case, “Check disc �” ap-pears on the screen.

If you do not insert the disc within 15 sec-onds after pushing the “LOAD” button, abeep will sound and the operation will becanceled automatically.If you need to insert the next disc, repeatthe same procedure to insert another disc.

� Setting all the discs:

1. Push the “LOAD” button until youhear a beep.The orange indicators at both ends of theslot start blinking. After the orange indica-tors change to green and stay on, the DVDchanger door will open.

2. Insert only one disc while the DVDchanger door is open.The DVD changer door closes and theorange indicators start blinking.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

204

3. Insert the next disc after the orangeindicators change to green and stay onand the DVD changer door opens.4. Repeat this procedure until you in-sert all the discs.To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD”button briefly.

If you do not insert the discs within 15 sec-onds after pushing the “LOAD” button, thebeep will sound and the operation will becanceled automatically.

NOTICE

Do not insert one disc stacked on topof another one or feed them in contin-uously, to prevent discs from gettingstuck in the changer.

INFORMATIONUnder extremely cold conditions, thedisplay may react slowly.

(b) Ejecting discs� A single disc alone:

1. Push the “ ” or “ ” button of“CH·DISC” or select the disc numberbutton on the “Change Discs” screento highlight the disc number you wantto eject.To display the “Change Discs” screen, se-lect “Change Discs” on each audio con-trol screen.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

205

2. Push the “ ” button for the discbriefly.At this time, the orange indicators of theslot start blinking and the disc is ejected.

3. After the blinking indicators stay on,remove the disc.

� Ejecting all the discs:

1. Push the “ ” button for the discuntil you hear a beep.At this time, the orange indicators of theslot start blinking and a disc is ejected.

2. After the blinking indicators stay on,remove the disc.The indicators start blinking again and thenext disc is ejected.

If you do not remove the disc within 15 sec-onds after it is ejected, the beep will soundand the operation will be canceled auto-matically.

When all the discs are removed, the indi-cators go out.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

206

The numbers of the trays where the disc isnot set are dimmed.

(c) Playing a disc

Push the “DISC” button to display au-dio screen and select “CD/DVD” tab ifthe discs are already loaded in thechanger.The discs set in the changer are playedcontinuously, starting with the last disc youinserted. The disc number of the disc cur-rently being played, the track or title andchapter number and the time from the be-ginning of the program appear on thescreen.

Audio CD only —

When play of one disc ends, the first trackof the following disc starts. When play ofthe final disc ends, play of the first discstarts again.

The changer will skip any empty disc trays.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

207

(d) Selecting a desired disc

On the screen:Select “CD/DVD” tab and select“Change Discs”.The selected disc number is highlighted.

The changer will start playing the selecteddisc from the first track.

On the audio panel:Push the “ ” or “ ” button of“CH·DISC”.When you release the button, the changerwill start playing the selected disc from thefirst track.

(e) Operating a DVD discNOTE: The playback condition of someDVD discs may be determined by a DVDsoftware producer. This DVD changerplays a disc as the software producerintended. So some functions may notwork properly. Be sure to read theinstruction manual for the DVD discseparately provided. For the detailedinformation about DVD video discs, see“(h) DVD player and DVD video discinformation” on page 225.Precautions on DVD video discWhen recording with a DVD video or videoCD, audio tracks may not record in somecases while the menu is displayed. As au-dio will not play in this case, verify that thevideo tracks are playing and then activateplayback.

When playback of a disc is completed:

� If an audio CD or MP3 disc is playing,the first track or file starts.

� If a DVD video or video CD is playing,playback will stop or the menu screenwill be displayed.

The title/chapter number and playbacktime display may not appear while playingback certain DVD video discs.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

208

CAUTION

Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volume toemphasize the impact of sound ef-fects. If you adjust the volume as-suming that the conversations repre-sent the maximum volume level thatthe DVD will play, you may be startledby louder sound effects or when youchange to a different audio source.The louder sounds may have a signif-icant impact on the human body orpose a driving hazard. Keep this inmind when you adjust the volume.

This screen appears when the videoscreen is first displayed after “ENGINESTART STOP” switch is in ACCESSO-RY or IGNITION ON mode.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

209

PLAYING A DVD DISC

Select “CD/DVD” tab to display thisscreen.Select “Settings” on “CD/DVD” screenand select “Wide” on “Settings” screen.The screen mode can be changed.

If you select “Full Screen” when the ve-hicle is completely stopped and the park-ing brake is applied, the video screen re-turns.

DVD SETTINGS

� DVD video

� DVD audio

If you select “Settings” on “DVD” screen,“Settings” screen appears.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

210

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO SET-TINGS“DVD Video Settings”: The initial set upscreen appears. (See page 217.)

“Search”: The title search screen ap-pears. (See page 213.)

“Return”: Selecting this will display thepredetermined scene and start playingfrom there.

“Audio”: The audio changing screen ap-pears. (See page 215.)

“Subtitle”: The subtitle changing screenappears. (See page 215.)

“Angle”: The angle selection screen ap-pears. (See page 216.)

“Wide”: The screen mode screen ap-pears. (See page 174.)

DESCRIPTION OF DVD AUDIO SET-TINGS“DVD Audio Settings”: The initial set upscreen appears. (See page 217.)

“Search”: The group search screen ap-pears.





“Wide”: The screen mode screen ap-pears. (See page 174.)

“Prev. Page”: Select this button to re-verse the pages. (See page 214.)

“Next Page”: Select this button to forwardthe pages. (See page 214.)

“Select Number”: The track or numbersearch screen appears. (See page 224.)

“RPT”: Select this button to repeat a track.

“RAND”: Select this button to play thetrack in one group in random order.

“SCAN”: Select this button to play thenext track in the group for 10 seconds, thenscan again.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

211

DISPLAYING DVD CONTROLS

� DVD video

� DVD audio

If you select , while watching video,

DVD controls will appear.

If “ ” appears on the screen when you se-lect a control, the operation relevant to thecontrol is not permitted.

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO CON-TROLS“Menu” and “Top Menu”: If you selectany of the above controls, the menuscreen for DVD video appears. (For theoperation, see the manual that come withthe DVD video disc provided separately.)

: The menu control key appears on the

screen. (See page 212.)

: Selecting this will pause the video

screen.

: Selecting this will fast reverse dur-

ing playback.

: Selecting this will stop the video

screen.

: Selecting this will resume normal

play during pause.

: Selecting this will fast forward dur-

ing playback and forward frame by frameduring pause.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

212

DESCRIPTION OF DVD AUDIO CON-TROLS“Top Menu”: If you select this button, themenu screen for DVD audio appears. (Forthe operation, see the manual that comewith the DVD audio disc provided sepa-rately.)

: The menu control key appears on the

screen. (See page 212.)

: Selecting this will pause the disc.


ing playback.

: Selecting this will stop the disc.

: Selecting this will resume normal

play during pause.



SELECTING A MENU ITEM

Enter the menu item using ,

, and and select“Enter”. The player starts playing discfor that menu item. Menu items canalso be selected using the pointer. (Fordetails, see the manual that comes withthe DVD disc provided separately.)When you select the any point on thescreen, the controls will disappear. To dis-play them again, select the any point onthe screen.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

213

SEARCHING BY TITLE

DVD video only—

Enter the title number and select “OK”.The player starts playing video for thattitle number.When you push either side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button, you can select achapter.

If you enter the wrong numbers, select

to delete the numbers.


SEARCHING BY GROUP

DVD audio only —

Enter the group number and select“OK”. The player starts playing thedisc for that group number.When you push either side of the“SEEK·TRACK” button, you can select atrack.




AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

214

SELECTING THE BONUS GROUPDVD audio only —

Enter the bonus group number on thesearching group screen and select“OK”.The “Enter Key Code” screen will appear.To enter the number of the group you wantto play, select the group number.




Select “OK” on the screen.The player starts playing the disc from theselected bonus group number.

CHANGING THE PAGE

DVD audio only —

Select “Prev. Page” or “Next Page” onthe screen to forward or reverse thepages.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

215

CHANGING THE SUBTITLELANGUAGE

Each time you select “Change”, the lan-guage is selected from the ones storedin the discs and changed.When you select “Hide”, the subtitle canbe hidden.


CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

DVD video only —

Each time you select “Change”, the lan-guage is selected from the ones storedin the discs and changed.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

216

CHANGING THE AUDIO FORMAT

DVD audio only —

Each time you select “Audio”, anotheraudio format stored on the disc is se-lected.


CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi−angle compatible when theangle mark appears on the screen.Each time you select “Change”, theangle is selected from the ones storedin the discs and changed.

When you select , and the previousscreen returns.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

217

SETUP MENU

There are initial setting buttons on the“Setup Menu” screen.After you change the initial setting, select

. The initial setting screen will beturned off and return to the picturepreviously.

When “Default” is selected, all menus areinitialized.

The initial setting can be changed.

� Audio languageYou can change the audio language.1. Select “Audio Language”.2. Select the language you want tohear on the “Audio Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want tohear on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. For the entry oflanguage code, see the following “ENTERAUDIO LANGUAGE CODE”.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen, se-lect .

� Subtitle languageYou can change the subtitle language.1. Select “Subtitle Language”.2. Select a language you want to readon the “Subtitle Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want toread on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. For the entry oflanguage code, see the following “ENTERAUDIO LANGUAGE CODE”.


� DVD languageYou can change the language on theDVD video menu.1. Select “DVD Language”.2. Select the language you want toread on the “DVD Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want toread on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. For the entry oflanguage code, see the following “ENTERAUDIO LANGUAGE CODE”.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

218

� Angle markThe multi−angle mark can be turned onor off on the screen while the discwhich is multi−angle compatible is be-ing played.1. Select “Angle Mark”.2. Select “On” or “Off”.� Parental lockThe level of viewer restrictions can bechanged.1. Select “Parental Lock”.2. Enter the 4−digit personal code onthe “Key code” screen.If you enter the wrong numbers, select



3. Select a parental level (1 — 8) on the“Select Restriction Level”. Select

to return to the “Setup Menu”screen.� Auto startDiscs that are inserted while the vehicle isin motion will automatically start playing.Certain discs may not play.

1. Select “Auto Start”.2. Select “On” or “Off”.� Sound dynamic range (if equipped)The difference between the lowest volumeand the highest volume can be adjusted.

1. Select “Sound Dynamic Range”.2. Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

ENTER AUDIO LANGUAGE CODE

If you select “Other” on the “SelectAudio Language” screen, “SelectSubtitle Language” screen or “DVDLanguage” screen, you can select thelanguage you want to hear or read byentering a language code.1. Enter the 4−digit language code.If you enter the wrong numbers, select


2. Select “OK”.

Code Language

0514 English

1001 Japanese

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

219

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czach

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

220

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan)Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

221

SETUP OPERATION FROM THE REARSEAT

This screen appears when a rear passen-ger selects the setup menu.

If you want to cancel the setup operationfrom the rear seat, select “Play”. Theplayer will resume normal play.

Under the same condition, the rear pas-senger can cancel the setup operationfrom the front seat.

To lock the operation of the player from therear seat, see “� Rear system lock” onpage 319.

(f) Operating a video CDPLAYING A VIDEO CD

Select “CD/DVD” tab to display thisscreen.When you select “Wide” on “Settings”screen, the screen mode can be changed.

If you select “Full Screen” when the ve-hicle is completely stopped and the park-ing brake is applied, the video screen re-turns.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

222

DISPLAYING VIDEO CD SETTINGS

If you select “Settings” on “CD/DVD”screen, “Settings” screen appears.

DESCRIPTION OF VIDEO CDSETTINGS� Controls on top page“Select Number”: The track or numbersearch screen appears. (See “SEARCH-ING BY TRACK” on page 224.)

“Prev. Page”: When you select this whilethe disc menu is displayed, the previouspage appears on the screen. If you selectthis while the player is playing video, theprevious track is searched and played.

“Next Page”: When you select this whilethe disc menu is displayed, the next pageappears on the display. If you select thiswhile the player is playing video, the nexttrack is searched and played.

“Main/Sub”: A multiplex transmissionchanging control. The mode changes fromMain/Sub to Main, to Sub and back toMain/Sub by selecting this control.


“Wide”: The screen mode screen ap-pears.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

223

DISPLAYING VIDEO CD CONTROLSIf you select the part where controls are notlocated while you are watching video onthe video CD, video CD controls will ap-pear.

If “ ” appears on the display when you se-lect a control, the operation is not per-mitted.

DESCRIPTION OF VIDEO CDCONTROLS

: Use this to pause the video screen.

: Select this to fast reverse during

playback.

: Select this to resume playing during

pause.

: Select this to fast forward during the

playback and start playing frame by frameduring pause.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

224

SEARCHING BY TRACK

Enter the track numbers and select“OK”. The player starts playing videofor that title number.You can select a track number by pushing“�” or “�” on the “SEEK·TRACK” but-ton.



Select , and the previous screen re-turns.

(g) If the changer malfunctionsIf the changer or another unit equippedwith the changer malfunction, your audio/video system will display following mes-sages.

If “Check disc �” appears on thedisplay: It indicates that the disc dirty,damaged, or it was inserted upside down.Clean the disc or insert it correctly. If a discwhich is not playable is inserted, “Checkdisc �” will also appear on the screen. Forappropriate discs for this changer, see“Audio/video system operating hints” onpage 269.

If “Region code error” appears on thedisplay: It indicates that the DVD regioncode is not set properly.

If “DVD error” appears on the display:It indicates that the inside of the player unitmay be too hot due to the very high ambi-ent temperature. Remove the disc fromthe player and allow the player to cooldown.

If the malfunction is not rectified: Takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

If an MP3 disc contains CD−DA files, onlyCD−DA files are played. If an MP3 disccontains files other than CD−DA, only MP3files are played.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

225

(h) DVD player and DVD video disc in-formationDVD VIDEO DISCSThis DVD player conforms to NTSC col-or TV formats. The DVD video disc con-forming to another formats such asPAL or SECAM cannot be used.Region codes: Some DVD video discshave a region code indicating a countrywhere you can use the DVD video disc onthis DVD player. If the DVD video disc isnot labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot useit on this DVD player. If you attempt to playan inappropriate DVD video disc on thisplayer, “Region code error” appears on thescreen. Even if the DVD video disc doesnot have a region code, there is a case thatyou cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSCformat of color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screen tobe selected.Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3Indicates a region codeby which this video disccan be played.ALL: in all countriesNumber: region code

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

226

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARYDVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discthat holds video. DVD video discs haveadopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-dards of digital compression technologies.The picture data is compressed by 1/40 onaverage and stored. Variable rate en-coded technology in which the volume ofdata assigned to the picture is changed de-pending on the picture format has alsobeen adopted. Audio data is stored usingPCM and Dolby Digital, which enableshigher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-ti−angle and multi−language features willalso help you enjoy the more advancedtechnology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limitswhat can be viewed in conformity with alevel of restrictions of the country. The lev-el of restrictions varies depending on theDVD video disc. Some DVD video discscannot be played at all, or violent scenesare skipped or replaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

Level 2 − 7: DVD video discs for childrenand G−rated movie can be played.

Level 8: All types of the DVD video discscan be played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy thesame scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can select alanguage of the subtitle and audio.

Region codes: The region codes are pro-vided on DVD players and DVD discs. Ifthe DVD video disc does not have thesame region code as the DVD player, youcannot play the disc on the DVD player.For region codes, see page 225.

Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for-mat DVD. Other decoded type cannot beplayed.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored in DVD video disc are divid-ed in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and au-dio programs stored on DVD video discs.Usually, one piece of movie, one album, orone audio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: The unit smaller than that of title.A title comprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Log-ic”, and the double−D symbol are trade-marks of Dolby Laboratories.This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that is protectedby method claims of certain U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual propertyrights owned by Macrovision Corpora-tion and other rights owners. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by MacrovisionCorporation, and is intended for homeand other limited viewing uses only un-less otherwise authorized by Macrovi-sion Corporation. Reverse engineeringor disassembly is prohibited.“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” areregistered trademarks of Digital The-ater Systems, Inc.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

227

The Bluetooth� audio system enablesusers to enjoy music played on a porta-ble player from the vehicle speaker viawireless communication.

This audio system supportsBluetooth�, a wireless data systemcapable of playing portable audiomusic without cables. If your portableplayer does not support Bluetooth�,the Bluetooth� audio system will notfunction.

INFORMATIONPortable players must correspond tothe following specifications in orderto be connected to the Bluetooth� au-dio system. However, please notethat some functions may be limiteddepending on the type of portableplayer.

� Bluetooth� SpecificationVer.1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver.2.0+EDR orhigher)

� Profile

A2DP (Advanced Audio Dis-tribution Profile) Ver.1.0

AVRCP (Audio/Video RemoteControl Profile) Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.3 or higher)

Please go to “http://www.lexus.com/”to find approved Bluetooth� phonesfor this system.

— Bluetooth� audiooperation

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

228

Bluetooth is a trademark owned byBluetooth SIG. Inc.

CAUTIONDo not operate the player’s controlsor connect to the Bluetooth� audiosystem while driving.

NOTICE

Do not leave your portable player inthe car. In particular, high tempera-tures inside the vehicle may damagethe portable player.

INFORMATION� In the following conditions, the

system may not function.� The portable player is turned off.� The portable player is not con-

nected.� The portable player has a low bat-

tery.� It may take time, the phone connec-

tion is carried out duringBluetooth� audio play.

1 Indicates the condition of theBluetooth� connection.

“Blue” indicates an excellent connectionto Bluetooth�.

“Yellow” indicates a bad connection toBluetooth�, resulting in possible deteriora-tion of audio quality.

: No connection to Bluetooth�.

2 Indicates the amount of batterycharge left.

Empty Full

Remaining charge is not displayed whilethe Bluetooth� is connecting.

The amount left does not always corre-spond with the one of your portable player.

This system doesn’t have a charging func-tion.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

229

An antenna for the Bluetooth�connection is built in to the instrumentpanel. The indication of the Bluetooth�connection may turn yellow and thesystem may not function when you usethe Bluetooth� portable player in thefollowing conditions.� Your portable player is hiding behind

from the display (behind the seat or inthe glove box or console box).

� Your portable player touches or is cov-ered with metal materials.

Leave the Bluetooth� portable player in aplace where the “Blue” indication is dis-played.

The portable player information is regis-tered when the Bluetooth� audio system isconnected. When you release possessionof your vehicle, remove your portable play-er. (See “(a) Removing a Bluetooth� au-dio” on page 380.)




CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radi-ation ExposureThis equipment complies with FCCradiation exposure limits set forth foruncontrolled equipment and meetsthe FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-sure Guidelines in Supplement C toOET65. This equipment has very lowlevels of RF energy that it deemed tocomply without maximum permis-sive exposure evaluation (MPE). Butit is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiatorand person’s body (excluding ex-tremities: hands, wrists, feet andankles).Co−location: This transmitter mustnot be co−located or operated in con-junction with any other antenna ortransmitter.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

230

(a) Connecting Bluetooth� audio play-erTo use the Bluetooth� audio system,you need to enter your portable playerinto the system. Once you haveregistered it, you can enjoy your musicon the vehicle’s audio system. (See“—Setting Bluetooth� audio” on page379.)For the operation procedure for theportable player, see the instructionmanual that comes with it.� When the connection method is

“From Vehicle”.� When the auto connection is on

When the portable player isstandby for the connection, itwill be automatically connectedwhenever the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch is in either AC-CESSORY or IGNITION ONmode.

� When the auto connection is offManually connect the portableplayer in accordance with thefollowing procedure.

Select “Connect”.

When the connection is completed, thisscreen is displayed. Now you can use theportable player.

This screen will appear when the connec-tion has failed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

231

� When the connection method is“From Portable Player”

Operate the portable player and con-nect it to the Bluetooth� audio system.For the operation procedure for theportable player, see the instructionmanual that comes with it.

Select “Connect”.

Connect the portable audio player to theBluetooth� audio system.

This screen will appear when the connec-tion has been successfully established.

� Reconnecting the portable playerIf the portable player is disconnected witha poor reception from the Bluetooth� net-work when the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON mode, the system automatically re-connects the portable player.

If the Bluetooth� is disconnected on pur-pose such as you turned your portableplayer off, this does not happen.

Reconnect it by the following method.

� Select the portable player again.� Enter the portable player.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

232

(b) Playing a Bluetooth� audio� Playing and pausing a Bluetooth�

audio

Select “BT” tab if the Bluetooth� audioplayer is already connected.

Select and the music will start playing.

Select and the music will pause.

Select and the music will start playingagain.

Depending on the portable player that isconnected to the system, the music may

start playing when selecting while it ispaused. On the other hand, the music may

pause when selecting while it is play-ing.

Some titles may not be displayed depend-ing on the type of portable player.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

233

� Selecting a desired track

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for directaccess to a desired track.

Push either side of the “SEEK·TRACK”button and repeat it until the desired tracknumber appears on the screen. As you re-lease the button, the portable player willstart playing the selected track from thebeginning.

Fast forward:Push and hold the “�” button of“SEEK·TRACK” to fast forward the play-er. When you release the button, the porta-ble player will resume playing from thatposition.

Reverse:Push and hold the “�” button of“SEEK·TRACK” to reverse the player.When you release the button, the playerwill resume playing.

INFORMATIONDepending on the portable player thatis connected to the system, certainfunctions may not be available.

� Selecting a desired album

“Album �”: Select this button to go tothe next album.“Album �”: Select this button to go tothe previous album.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

234

� Other function

“RPT”: Use this control to automatic re-play the track you are currently listening to.

Repeating a track—While the track is playing, select “RPT”briefly.“RPT” appears on the screen. When thetrack is finished, the player will automati-cally play it again. To cancel the repeat, se-lect “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use this for automatic and ran-dom selection of tracks on the album thatyou are currently listening to.

Playing the tracks in the album in ran-dom order—While the track is playing, select“RAND” briefly.“RAND” appears on the screen. The sys-tem selects a track in the album you arecurrently listening to. To cancel this func-tion, select “RAND” once again.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

235

Connecting a USB memory player oriPod� player enables you to enjoy mu-sic from the vehicle speakers.

CAUTIONDo not operate the player’s controlsor connect to the USB memory playeror iPod� player while driving.

NOTICE

� Do not leave your portable player inthe car. In particular, high tempera-tures inside the vehicle may dam-age the portable player.

� Do not push down on or apply un-necessary pressure to the portableplayer while it is connected as thismay damage the portable player orits terminal.

� Do not insert foreign objects intothe port as this may damage theportable player or its terminal.

(a) Connecting a USB memory playeror iPod� player

1. Slide the armrest while pulling upthe lever, and lift the armrest.2. Remove the upper tray.

3. Remove the lower tray.

—USB memory player/iPod player operation

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

236

4. Open the cover and connect a USBmemory player or iPod� player using aniPod� cable.

� Routing portable audio devicecables

When the cover is slide open, portable au-dio device cables can be pulled throughthe opening.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

237

(b) Playing a USB memory player oriPod� player� Playing and pausing a file or track

� USB memory player

� iPod� player

Select “USB” tab to display this screenif the USB memory player or iPod� play-er are already connected.

Select and the music will start playing.

Select and the music will pause.

Select and the music will start playingagain.

INFORMATION� When an iPod� player is connected

and the audio source is changed toiPod� player mode, the iPod� play-er will resume play from the samepoint in which it was last used.

� When the USB device is connectedand the audio source is changed toUSB memory player mode, theUSB device will start playing thefirst file in the first folder. If thesame device is removed and rein-serted (and the contents have notbeen changed), the USB device willresume play from the same point inwhich it was last used.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

238

� Selecting a play mode (iPod� playeronly)

1. Select “Menu”.

2. Select the desired play mode.

� Selecting a desired folder (USBmemory player only)

“Folder�”: Select this button to go to thenext folder.

“Folder�”: Select this button to go to theprevious folder.

“Select” for Folder: The desired foldercan be selected in a list. This function isavailable only when the vehicle is not mov-ing.

Select “Select”. The folder list is dis-played.

Select the desired folder number. Thechanger will start playing the first file of theselected folder.


moves up by 5 folder groups. If this buttonis selected when the top page of the list isdisplayed, the last page is displayed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

239


moves down by 5 folder groups. If this but-ton is selected when the last page of the listis displayed, the top page is displayed.

� Selecting a desired files or tracks

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for directaccess to a desired file or track.

Push either side of the “SEEK·TRACK”button and repeat it until the desired file ortrack appears on the screen. As you re-lease the button, the USB memory playeror iPod� player will start playing the se-lected file or track from the beginning.

Fast forward:Push and hold the “�” button of“SEEK·TRACK” to fast forward the play-er. When you release the button, the play-er will resume playing from that position.

Reverse:Push and hold the “�” button of“SEEK·TRACK” to reverse the player.When you release the button, the playerwill resume playing.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

240

“TUNE·FILE” knob: Use for direct accessto a desired file or track in the player.

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob to step up ordown all the files or tracks in the player youare currently listening to.

�USB memory player

�iPod� player

“Select” for File or Track: The desiredfile or track can be selected in a list. Thisfunction is available only when the vehicleis not moving.

Select “Select”. The file or track list is dis-played.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

241

Select the desired file or track number.The changer will start playing the selectedfile or track from the beginning.


moves up by 5 file or track groups. If thisbutton is selected when the top page of thelist is displayed, the last page is displayed.


moves down by 5 file or track groups. Ifthis button is selected when the last pageof the list is displayed, the top page is dis-played.

� Searching for a desired file (USBmemory player only)

Select “SCAN” on the screen or pushthe “SCAN” button briefly while themusic is playing.“SCAN” appears on the screen. The play-er will play the next file for 10 seconds,then scan again. To select a file, select“SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button a second time. If the play-er reaches the end of the memory, it willcontinue scanning at file1.

After all the files are scanned in one pass,normal play resumes.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

242

� Searching for a desired folder (USBmemory player only)

Select “SCAN” on the screen or pushthe “SCAN” button for longer than asecond while the music is playing.“FLD.SCAN” appears on the screen. Theprogram at the beginning of each folder willbe played for 10 seconds. To continue lis-tening to the program of your choice, se-lect “SCAN” on the screen or push the“SCAN” button a second time.

After all the folders are scanned in onepass, normal play resumes.

� Other function

� USB memory player

� iPod� player

“RPT”: Use this control to automatic re-play the file or track you are currently lis-tening to.

Repeating a file or track—While the file or track is playing, select“RPT” briefly.“RPT” appears on the screen. When thefile or track is finished, the player will auto-matically play it again. To cancel the re-peat, select “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use this for automatic and ran-dom selection of files or tracks on the al-bum that you are currently listening to.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

243

Repeating a folder (USB memory play-er only) —While the folder is playing, select“RPT” for longer than a second.“FLD.RPT” appears on the screen. Whenthe folder is finished, the changer will auto-matically go back to the beginning of thefolder and play the folder again. To cancelit, select “RPT” once again.

Playing the file or track in random or-der—While the file or track is playing, select“RAND” briefly.“RAND” appears on the screen. The sys-tem selects a file or track you are currentlylistening to. To cancel this function, select“RAND” once again.

Playing the files in all files in random or-der —Select “RAND” for longer than a secondwhile the music is playing. “FLD.RAND”appears on the screen. The system se-lects a file in all files. To cancel it, select“RAND” once again.

When a file is skipped or the system is in-operative, select “RAND” to reset.

Some parts of the audio system can be ad-justed using the switches on the steeringwheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.1 Volume control switch2 “MODE” switch3 “��” switch

1 Volume control switchPush “+” side to increase the volume. Thevolume continues to increase while theswitch is being pressed.

Push “–” side to decrease the volume.The volume continues to decrease whilethe switch is being pressed.

Audio/video remote controls(steering switches)

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

244

2 “MODE” switchPush “MODE” switch to select an audiomode. Each push changes the mode se-quentially if the desired mode is ready touse.

To turn the audio/video system on, pushthe “MODE” switch.

To turn the audio/video system off, pushand hold the “MODE” switch until you heara beep.3 “��” switch

RadioThis switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do this againto find the next station. If you push theswitch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you hear abeep. When you release from the switch,the radio will begin seeking up or down fora station. Do this again to find the next sta-tion.

XM� Satellite Radio—

To select a preset channel, push the “�”or “�” side of the switch. Repeat until adesired channel is found.

CD changer or DVD changerUse this switch to skip up or down to a dif-ferent track, file or chapter in either direc-tion.

To select a desired track, file or chapter:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track, file orchapter you want to play is set. If you wantto return to the beginning of the currenttrack, file or chapter, push the “�” side ofthe switch once, quickly.

To select a desired disc:Push and hold the “�” or “�” switch untilyou hear a beep to change to the next orthe previous disc. Repeat this operationuntil you reach the disc you want to listento.

Bluetooth� audio playerUse this switch to skip up or down to a dif-ferent track or album in either direction.

To select a desired track:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to return to thebeginning of the current track, push the“�” side of the switch once quickly.

To select a desired album:Push and hold “�” or “�” switch until youhear a beep to change to the next or theprevious album. Repeat this operation un-til you reach the album you want to listento.

USB memory player/iPod� playerUse this switch to skip up or down to a dif-ferent file or track in either direction.

To select a desired file or track:Push the “�” or “�” side of the switch un-til the file or track you want to listen to is set.If you want to return to the beginning of thecurrent file or track, push the “�” side ofthe switch once quickly.

To select a desired folder (USB memoryplayer only):

Push and hold “�” or “�” switch until youhear a beep to change to the next or theprevious folder. Repeat this operation untilyou reach the folder you want to listen to.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

245

The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy audioand DVD video.

1 Front audio system2 Displays3 Rear seat entertainment system con-

troller4 Power outlet

5 A/V input adapter6 Headphone volume control dials and

headphone jacks7 Power outlet main switch

Rear seat entertainment system features —

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

246

The rear seat entertainment system canbe used when the “ENGINE STARTSTOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-TION ON mode.

� Displays

A display is installed in the back of eachfront seat. When audio−video equipmentis connected to the A/V input adapter, rearpassengers can enjoy different audiosources on each display. See “—Using thevideo mode” on page 266.

� Rear seat entertainment systemcontroller

Use the controller to operate both the leftand right side displays. Some controllerbuttons are shared between the left andright side displays. When operating thosebuttons, first select the desired display us-ing the select display switch.

To operate, aim the controller at the de-sired display.

1 Controller buttons for the left side dis-play

2 Controller buttons for the right sidedisplay

3 Turns display off4 Selects the display to be operated

(for some controller buttons only)

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

247

� Before using the controller (for newvehicle owners)

An insulating sheet is set to prevent thebatteries from being discharged. Removethe insulating sheet before using the re-mote control.

� Replacing the controller batteriesNecessary item for replacing “3 AA bat-teries”.

1. Remove the cover.

2. Remove the depleted batteries andinstall the new ones.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

248

If the batteries are discharged, the fol-lowing symptoms may occur.� The rear seat entertainment system

controller will not function properly.

� The operational range is reduced.

When using 3 AA batteries� Batteries can be purchased at your

Lexus dealer, electric appliance shop,or camera stores.

� Replace only with the same or equiva-lent type recommended by a Lexusdealer.

� Dispose of used batteries according tothe local laws.

� Headphone jacks

1 To use the headphones, connectthem to the jack.

2 To adjust the volume1. Push the knob.2. Turn the knob clockwise to increasethe volume. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to decrease the volume.3. Push the knob again.� HeadphonesWith some headphones generally avail-able in the market, it may be difficult tocatch signals properly. Lexus recom-mends the use of Lexus genuine wirelessheadphones.

Please contact your Lexus dealer for fur-ther details.

� VolumeAdjust the volume when you connect theheadphones to the jack. Loud sounds mayhave a significant impact on the humanbody.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

249

� Caution screen

This screen appears for a few secondswhen the “ENGINE START STOP” switchis in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode.

� Changing the source

1 Turning on the audio source selectionscreen

2 Inputting the selected icon3 Selecting an icon

Push “SOURCE” to display the audiosource selection screen.

Select an audio source.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

250

� Changing the speaker output

To play the rear audio over the speakers inthe vehicle, turn “Speaker Output” on.

CAUTION

� While drivingDo not use headphones. Doing so may cause an accident,resulting in death or serious injury.

� To prevent accidents and electricshockDo not disassemble or modify theremote control.

� When the remote control is notusedStow the remote control. Injuriesmay result in the event of an acci-dent or sudden braking.

� Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volumelevel that the DVD will play, youmay be startled by louder sound ef-fects or when you change to a dif-ferent audio source. The loudersounds may have a significant im-pact on the human body or pose adriving hazard. Keep this in mindwhen you adjust the volume.

� Removed battery and other parts:� Keep away from children.� These parts are small and if swal-

lowed by a child they can causechoking.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

251

NOTICE

� Cleaning the display

Wipe the display with a dry softcloth.

If the screen is wiped with a roughcloth, the surface of the screenmay be scratched.

� To prevent damage to the remotecontrol

Keep the remote control away fromdirect sunlight, temperature heatand high humidity.

Do not drop or knock the remotecontrol against hard objects.

Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the remote control.

� For normal operation after replac-ing the battery, observe the follow-ing precautions to prevent acci-dents:� Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the batteryto rust.

� Do not touch or move any othercomponents inside the remotecontrol.

� Do not bend either of the batteryterminals.

Select radio mode on the source screen todisplay the control screen.

1 Selecting a preset station2 Tuning the station� Selecting a preset stationPush “ ” or “ ” of “DISC·CH” until thedesired station band appears on thescreen.

� Tuning the stationPush “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE” until the de-sired station appears on the screen.

Push “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE” and the sta-tions will be searched automatically oneafter another.

— Using the radio

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

252

1 Turning on DVD player mode2 Selecting a disc� Selecting a disc

Push “ ” or “ ” of “CH·DISC” until thedesired disc number appears on thescreen.

� Audio CD, CD text 252. . . . . . . . . . . .

� MP3/WMA disc 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� DVD video/audio 253. . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Video CD 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Selecting a track

Push “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE” until the de-sired track number appears on the screen.

� Fast forwarding or reversing a trackPush and hold “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE”.

— Using the DVD player— Playing an audio CD/CDtext

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

253

� Selecting a file

1 Selecting a file2 Selecting a folder

Push “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE” until the de-sired file number appears on the screen.

� Selecting a folderPush “ ” or “ ” of “FOLDER” until thedesired folder number appears on thescreen.

� Fast forwarding or reversing a filePush “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE”.

� Controller

— Playing WMA/MP3 discs — Playing DVD video/audio

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

254

1 Turning on the DVD mode2 Inputting the selected icon3 Selecting an icon4 Turning on the menu disc5 Playing/pausing a disc6 Fast forwarding a disc7 Turning on the control icon screen8 Reversing a disc9 Turning on the title selection screen

10 Push to select a chapter/track

Push and hold to fast forwarding orreversing a chapter/track

� DVD video and DVD audioPush “OPTION” if no icons are shownwhile watching a DVD video or DVD audio,and following screens appear.

� DVD video

� DVD audio

“Settings”: Selecting this will display set-ting screen.

“Hide Buttons”: Selecting this will turn offthe icons from the screen.

If “ ” appears on the screen when you se-lect a control, the operation relevant to thecontrol is not permitted.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

255

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO CON-TROLS“Menu” and “Top Menu”: If you selectany of the above controls, the menuscreen for DVD video appears. (For theoperation, see the manual that come withthe DVD video disc provided separately.)


ing playback.


screen.

: Selecting this will pause/resumethe video screen.



DESCRIPTION OF DVD AUDIO CON-TROLS“Top Menu”: If you select this button, themenu screen for DVD audio appears. (Forthe operation, see the manual that comewith the DVD audio disc provided sepa-rately.)



ing playback.

: Selecting this will stop the disc.

: Selecting this will pause/resumethe disc.



AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

256

DVD SETTINGSWhen “Settings” is selected on the con-trol icon screens, the following screens willappear according to audio mode.

� DVD video

� DVD audio

DESCRIPTION OF DVD VIDEO SET-TINGS“Setup”: The initial set up screen ap-pears. (See page 261.)

“Search”: The title search screen ap-pears. (See page 257.)





AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

257

DESCRIPTION OF DVD AUDIO SET-TINGS“Setup”: The initial set up screen ap-pears. (See page 261.)

“Select Number”: The track or numbersearch screen appears. (See page 259.)

“Search”: The group search screen ap-pears.


“Prev. Page”: Select this button to re-verse the pages.

“Next Page”: Select this button to forwardthe pages.




SEARCHING BY TITLE

DVD video only—

Select “Search” on the settings screen.Enter the title number and select “OK”.The player starts playing video for thattitle number.When you push “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE”,you can select a chapter.




AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

258

SEARCHING BY GROUP

DVD audio only —

Select “Search” on the settings screen.Enter the group number and select“OK”. The player starts playing thedisc for that group number.When you push “ ” or “ ” of “TUNE”,you can select a track.




SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

DVD audio only —

Select “Search” on the settings screen.Enter the bonus group number on thesearching group screen and select“OK”.The “Enter Key Code” screen will appear.To enter the number of the group you wantto play, select the group number.




Select “OK” on the screen.The player starts playing the disc from theselected bonus group number.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

259

SELECTING THE MENU NUMBERDVD audio only —

Select “Select Number” on the settingsscreen.Enter the menu number and select“OK”.If you enter the wrong numbers, select



CHANGING THE SUBTITLELANGUAGE

Select “Subtitle” on the settingsscreen.Each time you select “Subtitle”, the lan-guage is selected from the ones storedin the discs and changed.When you select “Hide”, the subtitle canbe hidden.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

260

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

DVD video only —

Select “Audio” on the settings screen.Each time you select “Audio”, the lan-guage is selected from the ones storedin the discs and changed.


CHANGING THE AUDIO FORMATDVD audio only —

Select “Audio” on the control iconscreen.Each time you select “Audio”, anotheraudio format stored on the disc is se-lected.


AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

261

CHANGING THE ANGLESelect “Angle” on the settings screen.The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi−angle compatible when theangle mark appears on the screen.Each time you select “Angle”, the angleis selected from the ones stored in thediscs and changed.

When you select , and the previousscreen returns.

SETUP MENU

Select “Setup” on the settings screen.There are initial setting buttons on the“Setup Menu” screen.After you change the initial setting, select“OK”. The initial setting screen will beturned off and return to the picturepreviously.

When “Default” is selected, all menus areinitialized.

The initial setting can be changed.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

262

� Audio languageYou can change the audio language.1. Select “Audio Language”.2. Select the language you want tohear on the “Audio Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want tohear on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. For the entry oflanguage code, see the following “ENTERAUDIO LANGUAGE CODE”.


� Subtitle languageYou can change the subtitle language.1. Select “Subtitle Language”.2. Select a language you want to readon the “Subtitle Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want toread on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. For the entry oflanguage code, see the following “ENTERAUDIO LANGUAGE CODE”.


� DVD languageYou can change the language on theDVD video menu.1. Select “DVD Language”.2. Select the language you want toread on the “DVD Language” screen.If you cannot find the language you want toread on this screen, select “Other” andenter a language code. For the entry oflanguage code, see the following “ENTERAUDIO LANGUAGE CODE”.


� Angle markThe multi−angle mark can be turned onor off on the screen while the discwhich is multi−angle compatible is be-ing played.1. Select “Angle Mark”.2. Select “ON” or “OFF”.� Parental lockThe level of viewer restrictions can bechanged.1. Select “Parental Lock”.2. Enter the 4−digit personal code onthe “Key code” screen.If you enter the wrong numbers, select



3. Select a parental level (1 — 8) on the“Select Restriction Level”. Select

to return to the “Setup Menu”screen.� Sound dynamic range (if equipped)The difference between the lowest volumeand the highest volume can be adjusted.

1. Select “Sound Dynamic Range”.2. Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

263

ENTER AUDIO LANGUAGE CODE

If you select “Other” on the “SelectAudio Language” screen, “SelectSubtitle Language” screen or “DVDLanguage” screen, you can select thelanguage you want to hear or read byentering a language code. (See page218.)1. Enter the 4−digit language code.If you enter the wrong numbers, select


2. Select “OK”.

� Video CDPush “OPTION” if no icons are shownwhile watching a video CD, and followingscreen appears.

“Settings”: Selecting this will display set-ting screen.

“Hide Buttons”: Selecting this will turn offthe icons from the screen.

If “ ” appears on the display when you se-lect a control, the operation is not per-mitted.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

264

DESCRIPTION OF VIDEO CDCONTROLS

: Select this to fast reverse during

playback.


screen.

: Use this to pause/resume the vid-eo screen.

: Select this to fast forward during the

playback and start playing frame by frameduring pause.

VIDEO CD SETTINGSWhen “Settings” is selected on the con-trol icon screen, the following screen willappear.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

265

DESCRIPTION OF VIDEO CDSETTINGS“Select Number”: The track or numbersearch screen appears. (See “SEARCH-ING BY TRACK” on page 265.)


“Prev. Page”: When you select this whilethe disc menu is displayed, the previouspage appears on the screen. If you selectthis while the player is playing video, theprevious track is searched and played.

“Next Page”: When you select this whilethe disc menu is displayed, the next pageappears on the display. If you select thiswhile the player is playing video, the nexttrack is searched and played.

“MAIN/SUB”: A multiplex transmissionchanging control. The mode changes fromMain/Sub to Main, to Sub and back toMain/Sub by selecting this control.

SEARCHING BY TRACKSelect “Select Number” on the settingsscreen.Enter the track numbers and select“OK”. The player starts playing videofor that title number.You can select a track number by pushing“ ” or “ ” of “TUNE”.



Select , and the previous screen re-turns.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

266

Push “VIDEO” to select the video mode.

Before switching to the video mode, con-nect the audio−video equipment to the A/Vinput adapter.

When “Speaker Output” is off, any au-dio−video source can be selected for theother rear display. See “� Changing thespeaker output” on page 250.

� Using the adapter

Open the cover.The A/V input adapter is composed of 3 in-put adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

White: Left channel audio input adapter

Red: Right channel audio input adapter

The rear seat entertainment system playsvideos and sound when audio−videoequipment is connected to the A/V inputadapter. For details, refer to the manufac-turer’s instructions.

The power outlet is used to connect the au-dio−video equipment. See the vehicleowner’s manual.

NOTICE

When the A/V input adapter is not inuse, keep the A/V input adapter coverclosed. Inserting anything other thanan appropriate plug may cause elec-trical failure or a short circuit.

— Using the video mode

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

267

� Changing to PAL format

Push “DISPLAY”.

If the video does not appear, turn “PALVIDEO” on.

“PAL VIDEO” will be displayed when PALformat equipment is connected to the A/Vinput adapter.

� Setting the display mode

Pushing “SIZE” changes the displaymodes sequentially as follows:

Normal → “Wide 1” → Wide 2

— Changing other settings

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

268

� Adjusting the screen

Push “DISPLAY”.

Select the desired button to adjust col-or, tone, contrast and brightness. Afteradjusting the screen, touch “OK”.

“Color” “R”:Strengthens the red color of the screen.

“Color” “G”:Strengthens the green color of the screen.

“Tone” “+”: Strengthens the tone of thescreen.

“Tone” “−”: Weakens the tone of thescreen.

“Contrast” “+”:Strengthens the contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “−”:Weakens the contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+”:Brightens the screen.

“Brightness” “−”:Darkens the screen.

The screen goes off when “Screen Off” istouched. To turn the display screen backon, push “DVD”, “VIDEO”, “OFF” or“DISPLAY” for the display. The selectedscreen appears.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

269

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video sys-tem operations:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the audio/video system.

� Do not put anything other than anappropriate discs into the CDchanger or DVD changer.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the au-dio/video system which you are lis-tening to. However, this does notindicate a malfunction.

� Radio receptionUsually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem with yourradio — it is just the normal result of condi-tions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal will be.In addition, reception conditions changeconstantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FMFading and drifting stations — Generally,the effective range of FM is about 25 miles(40 km). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path — FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If this hap-pens, the signals will cancel each otherout, causing a momentary flutter or loss ofreception.

Static and fluttering — These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping — If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weakened,and there is another strong station nearbyon the FM band, your radio may tune in thesecond station until the original signal canbe picked up again.

AMFading — AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere — especially atnight. These reflected signals can inter-fere with those received directly from theradio station, causing the radio station tosound alternately strong and weak.

Station interference — When a reflectedsignal and a signal received directly froma radio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static — AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

Audio/video systemoperating hints

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

270

XM�

Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM� Satellite Radio.

Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization may in-validate the user’s right to operate theequipment.

iPod� playerAbout iPod� —iPod is registered trademarks of Apple,Inc.

Compatible models —� iPod� 5th generation Ver. 1.2 or later

� iPod� nano 3rd generation Ver. 1.0 orlater

� iPod� nano 2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2or later

� iPod� nano Ver. 1.2 or later

� iPod� touch Ver. 1.1 or later

� iPod� classic Ver. 1.0 or later

iPhone�, iPod� mini, iPod� shuffle, iPod�photo and 4th generation and earlier mod-els of iPod� are not compatible with thissystem.

USB memory playerUSB memory players that can be usedfor MP3 and WMA playback.

� USB communication formats: USB 2.0FS (12 MBPS)

� File formats: FAT 16/32 (Windows�)

� Correspondence class: Mass storageclass

CARING FOR YOUR CD CHANGER,DVD CHANGER AND DISCS� Your CD changer and DVD changer is

intended for use with 4.7 in. (12 cm)discs only.

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour CD changer and DVD changerfrom working. On hot days, use the airconditioning to cool the vehicle interiorbefore you use the changer and player.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your CD changer and DVD chan-ger skip.

� If moisture gets into your CD changerand DVD changer, you may not playeven though they appear to be workin-g. Remove the discs from the changerand wait until it dries.

CAUTIONCD changer and DVD changer use aninvisible laser beam which couldcause hazardous radiation exposureif directed outside the unit. Be sure tooperate the changers correctly.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

271

CD changer

XS18016

� Use only discs marked as shown abo-ve. The following products may not beplayable on your changer.

SACDCopy−protected CDCD−ROM

DVD changer

Audio CDs

DVD videodiscs

Video CDs

DVD audiodiscs

� Use only discs marked as shown abo-ve. The following products may not beplayable on your changer.

SACDCopy−protected CDCD−ROMDVD+RDVD+RWDVD−ROMDVD−RAM

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

272

� Special shaped discs

� Transparent/translucent discs

� Low quality discs

� Labeled discs

NOTICE

� Do not use special shaped, trans-parent/translucent, low quality orlabeled discs such as those shownin the illustrations. The use of suchdiscs may damage the player orchanger, or it may be impossible toeject the disc.

� This system is not designed for useof Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Discbecause it may cause damage tothe changer.

� Do not use a disc with protectionring. The use of such disc maydamage the changer, or it may beimpossible to eject the disc.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

273

� Correct � Wrong

� Handle discs carefully, especiallywhen you are inserting them. Holdthem on the edge and do not bend the-m. Avoid getting fingerprints on them,particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold the discup to the light.)

� Remove discs from the players whenyou are not using them. Store them intheir plastic cases away from moisture,heat, and direct sunlight.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened withwater. Wipe in a straight line from the cen-ter to the edge of the disc (not in circles).Dry it with another soft, lint−free cloth. Donot use a conventional record cleaner oranti−static device.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

274

MP3/WMA FILES� MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media� Audio) are audiocompression standards.

� The MP3/WMA player can play MP3and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−Rand CD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level2 and with the Romeo and Joliet filesystem.

� When naming an MP3 or WMA file, addthe appropriate file extension (.mp3 or.wma).

� The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions asMP3 or WMA files. To prevent noiseand playback errors, use the appropri-ate file extensions.

� The MP3/WMA player can play onlythe first session using multi−sessioncompatible CDs.

� MP3 player—MP3 files are compatiblewith the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver.2.2, and Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit can-not display disc title, track title and art-ist name in other formats.

� USB memory player—MP3 files arecompatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0,Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4formats. The unit cannot track title andartist name in other formats.

� WMA files can contain a WMA tag thatis used in the same way as an ID3 tag.WMA tags carry information such astrack title, artist name.

� The emphasis function is availableonly when playing MP3/WMA files re-corded at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.

Sampling frequencyMP3 files for MP3 player:MPEG 1 LAYER 3—32, 44.1, 48 kHzMPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3—16, 22.05, 24kHzMP3 files for USB memory player:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3—32,44.1, 48 kHzMPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3—16,22.05, 24 kHzMPEG 2.5—8, 11.025, 12 kHzWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8, 9 CBR—32, 44.1, 48 kHzWMA files for USB memory player:Ver. 9—HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48kHz

� The sound quality of MP3/WMA filesgenerally improves with higher bit rate-s. In order to achieve a reasonable lev-el of sound quality, discs recorded witha bit rate of at least 128 kbps are rec-ommended.

Playable bit ratesMP3 files for MP3 player:MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbpsMP3 files for USB memory player:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3—32 to320 kbpsMPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3—32 to160 kbpsMPEG 2.5—32 to 160 kbpsWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbpsWMA files for USB memory player:Ver. 9 CBR—32 to 320 kbps

� The MP3/WMA player does not playback MP3/WMA files from discs re-corder using packet write data transfer(UDF format). Discs should be re-corded using “pre−mastering” softwarerather than packet−write software.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

275

� M3u playlists are not compatible withthe audio player.

� MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PROformats are not compatible with the au-dio player.

� The player is compatible with VBR(Variable Bit Rate).

� When playing back files recorded asVBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the playtime will not be correctly displayed iffast−forward or reverse operations areused.

� It is not possible to check folders thatdo not include MP3/WMA files.

� MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levelsdeep can be played. However, thestart of playback may be delayed whenusing discs containing numerous lev-els of folders. For this reason, we rec-ommend creating discs with no morethan two levels of folders.

6U5161aX

001.mp3002.wma

Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2004.mp3005.wma

Folder 3006.mp3

� The play order of the compact disc withthe structure shown above is as fol-lows:

001.mp3 002.wma . . . 006.mp3

� MP3/WMA player—It is possible toplay up to 192 folders or 255 files onone disc.

� USB memory player—It is possible toplay up to 999 folders, 255 files perfolder or 65,025 files in device.

� The order changes depending on thePC and MP3/WMA encoding softwareyou use.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

276

CD−R and CD−RW discs� CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not

been subject to the “finalizing process”(a process that allows discs to beplayed on a conventional CD player)cannot be played.

� It may not be possible to play CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a musicCD recorder or a personal computerbecause of disc characteristics,scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,condensation, etc. on the lens of theunit.

� It may not be possible to play discs re-corded on a personal computer de-pending on the application settings andthe environment. Record with the cor-rect format. (For details, contact theappropriate application manufacturersof the applications.)

� CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damagedby direct exposure to sunlight, hightemperatures or other storage condi-tions. The unit may be unable to playsome damaged discs.

� If you insert a CD−RW disc into theMP3/WMA player, playback will beginmore slowly than with a conventionalCD or CD−R disc.

� Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannotbe played using the DDCD (DoubleDensity CD) system.

TERMSPacket write—This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on−demand toCD−R, etc., in the same way that data iswritten to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—This is a method of embedding track−re-lated information in an MP3 file. This em-bedded information can include the tracktitle, the artist’s name, the album title, themusic genre, the year of production, com-ments and other data. The contents canbe freely edited using software with ID3 tagediting functions. Although the tags are re-stricted to the number of characters, the in-formation can be viewed when the track isplayed back.

WMA Tag—WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track title,artist name.

ISO 9660 format—This is the international standard for theformatting of CD−ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are two lev-els of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 characterfile names, with a 3 character file exten-sion. File names must be composed ofone−byte capital letters and numbers. The“_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 characters(including the separation mark “.” and fileextension). Each folder must contain few-er than 8 hierarchies.

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM

277

m3u—Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—MP3 is an audio compression standard de-termined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data toabout 1/10 the size of that on conventionaldiscs.

WMA—WMA (Windows Media� Audio) is an audiocompression format developed by Micro-soft�. It compresses files into a size small-er than that of MP3 files. The decoding for-mats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and 9.

SECTION 7

AIR CONDITIONING

278

AIR CONDITIONING

Air conditioning

� Automatic air conditioning controls 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AIR CONDITIONING

279

Operations such as changing the air outlets or fan speed are carried out on the screen.To display the air conditioning control screen, push the “MENU” button and select “Cli-mate”.

1 Driver side temperature display (In degrees Fahrenheit or Centi-grade)

2 Outside temperature display (In degrees Fahrenheit or Centi-grade) 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 “DUAL” (Temperature setting mode changebutton) 281, 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 Air flow control buttons 283. . . . 5 Passenger side temperature dis-

play (In degrees Fahrenheit or Centi-grade)

6 Fan speed control buttons(With fan off function) 282. . . . . . . .

7 Windshield wiper de−icer button287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 “A/C” 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Air intake control button

282, 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Rear window defogger button

287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Windshield air flow button

285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 “AUTO” button 281. . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic air conditioning controls

AIR CONDITIONING

280

13 “PASSENGER TEMP” buttons(Passenger side temperature controlbutton) (Only for the independent mode thatdisplay shows “DUAL”; mainly forfront passenger and secondarily fordriver) 281, 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 “TEMP” buttons(Driver side temperature control but-ton) (At the independent mode thatdisplay shows “DUAL”; mainly fordriver and secondarily for front pas-senger)(At the linked mode that display doesnot show “DUAL”; for driver)

281, 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(a) Climate controlAir outlets and fan speed are automati-cally adjusted according to the temper-ature setting.The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mustbe in IGNITION ON mode.

Push the “MENU” button and select“Climate” to display the air condition-ing control screen.

INFORMATIONWhen the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is turn on, the air conditioningsystem settings will be set to thosethat were in use the last time the “EN-GINE START STOP” switch wasturned off. Air conditioning systemsettings are memorized individuallyon each electronic key, so the set-tings reproduced will be specific tothe key that is used.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the air condi-tioning on longer than necessarywhen the engine is not running.

AIR CONDITIONING

281

By pushing the switch above, you canoperate the speech command system.For the operation of the speech commandsystem and the command, see pages 49and 54.

(b) Using automatic air conditioningsystem� Switching to automatic operation

mode

Push the “AUTO” button.The air conditioning system begins to op-erate. Air outlets and fan speed are auto-matically adjusted according to the tem-perature setting.

Push and hold “�OFF” button to turn theair conditioning system off.

� Setting the vehicle interior tempera-ture

Push the “�” button on “TEMP” to in-crease the temperature and “�” to de-crecase the temperature.

AIR CONDITIONING

282

“DUAL” button is used to set the tempera-tures independently for the driver’s seatand front passenger seat.

When the “DUAL” indicator is on, the tem-perature for the driver’s seat and front pas-senger seat can be adjusted separately.

� Switching the air intake control toautomatic mode

Push the air intake control button toswitch to automatic mode.The air conditioning system automaticallyswitches between outside air and recircu-lated air modes.

INFORMATIONYou can adjust the setting in automat-ic mode. (See page 389.)

(c) Adjusting the settings manually� Setting the fan speed

To turn on the air conditioning systemand adjust the fan speed, push the “�”button on fan speed control button toincrease the fan speed and push the “�OFF” button to decrease the fan speed.To turn the fan off, push and hold the “�OFF” button.

Using the screen—

1 Fan speed at low2 Fan speed at high

AIR CONDITIONING

283

� Setting the vehicle interior tempera-ture

To adjust the temperature setting, pushthe “�” button on “TEMP” to increasethe temperature and push the “�” but-ton to decrease the temperature.When the “DUAL” indicator is on, the tem-perature for the driver’s seat and front pas-senger seat can be adjusted separately.

� Switching the air outlets

To change the air outlets, push the“MODE” button.The air outlets used are switched eachtime the button is pushed.

Using the screen—

1 Panel2 Bi−level3 Floor4 Floor/windshield

The air flow shown on the display indicatesthe following.

�Air flows to the upper body (Panel)

AIR CONDITIONING

284

�Air flows to the upper body and feet(Bi−level)

�Air flows to the feet (Floor)

�Air flows to the feet and the wind-shield defogger operates (Floor/windshield)

� Switching between outside air andrecirculated air modes

Push the air intake control button.The mode switches between outside airmode (the indicator is off), “AUTO” modeand recirculated air mode (the indicator ison) each time the button is pushed.

AIR CONDITIONING

285

(d) Defogging the windshield

The air conditioning system operatesautomatically.

Recirculated air mode will automaticallyswitch to outside air mode. It is not pos-sible to return to recirculated air modewhen the switch is on.

CAUTION

To prevent the windshield from fog-ging upDo not use the windshield air flowbutton during cool air operation inextremely humid weather. The differ-ence between the temperature of theoutside air and that of the windshieldcan cause the outer surface of thewindshield to fog up, blocking yourvision.

(e) Adjusting the position of and open-ing and closing the air outlets

�Front center outlets

1 Direct air flow to the left or right, upor down

2 Turn the knob to open or close thevent

�Front side outlets



AIR CONDITIONING

286

�Rear outlets



INFORMATION� Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatical-ly according to the temperaturesetting and ambient conditions.As a result, the following may oc-cur:

� The system may switch automat-ically to recirculated air modewhen the coolest temperaturesetting is selected in summer.

� Immediately after the button ispushed, the fan may stop for awhile until warm or cool air isready to flow.

� Using the system in recirculatedair mode

The windows will fog up more easi-ly if recirculated air mode is usedfor an extended period.

� Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may auto-matically switch to outside airmode in situations where the win-dows need to be defogged.

� When outside air temperature isbelow 32�F (0�C)

The cooling and dehumidificationfunction may not operate evenwhen “A/C” is on.

� When the indicator light on “A/C”flashes

Select “A/C” to turn off the coolingand dehumidification function andturn it on again. There may be aproblem in the air conditioningsystem if the indicator light contin-ues to flash. Turn the air condition-ing system off and have it in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

� Automatic air intake change mode

In automatic mode, the system au-tomatically switches between re-circulated air and outside airmodes according to whether thesystem detects harmful sub-stances such as exhaust gas in theair outside.If you select automatic mode whenonly the fans are operating, the airconditioning system will turn onautomatically.

AIR CONDITIONING

287

(f) Windshield wiper de−icer (ifequipped)This feature is used to prevent ice frombuilding up on the windshield and wiperblades.

The windshield wiper de−icer can be oper-ated when the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Turns the windshield wiper de−iceron/off.The windshield wiper de−icer will automat-ically turn off after approximately 15 min-utes.

CAUTION

When the windshield wiper de−icer isonDo not touch the lower part of thewindshield or the side of the front pil-lars, as the surfaces can become veryhot and burn you.

(g) Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogging

To turn the electric rear window andoutside rear view mirror defogger on,push the button above.The “ENGINE START STOP” switch mustbe in IGNITION ON mode.

The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window and the heater panels in theoutside rear view mirrors will quickly clearthe surface.

Keep your hands off the mirror faces whenthe system is on.

The indicator light is on when the defoggeris operating.

CAUTION

When the outside rear view mirror de-foggers are on, do not touch the out-side surface of the rear view mirror asit can become very hot and burn you.

AIR CONDITIONING

288

The system will automatically shut offwhen the defogger has operated about 15minutes.

If further defrosting or defogging is de-sired, simply actuate the switch again.When the surface has cleared, push thebutton once again to turn the defogger off.Continuous use may cause the battery todischarge, especially during stop−and−godriving. The defogger is not designed todry rain water or to melt snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavilycoated with ice, use a spray de−icer beforeoperating the system.

NOTICE

� When cleaning the inside of therear window, be careful not toscratch or damage the heater wiresor connectors.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the engine is not running.

(h) Outside temperature display

Outside temperature is displayed onthe screen.The displayed temperature ranges from−40�F (−40�C) up to 122�F (50�C).

If the temperature shows “− −” or “E”, takeyour vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

In the following situations, the correct out-side temperature may not be displayed, orthe display may take longer than normal tochange.

� When stopped, or driving at lowspeeds (less than 15.5 mph [25 km/h])

� When the outside temperature haschanged suddenly (at the entrance/exitof a garage, tunnel, etc.)

AIR CONDITIONING

289

SECTION 8

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

290


��

� Rear view monitor system 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


291

The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image of theview behind the vehicle while backingup. The image is displayed in reverseon the screen. This allows the image toappear in the same manner as that ofthe rear view mirror.To display the rear view image on thescreen, shift the shift lever to “R” whenthe “ENGINE START STOP” switch is inIGNITION ON mode.If you move the shift lever out of the “R”, thescreen returns to the previous screen. Op-erating another function of the navigationsystem will display another screen.

Vehicles with intuitive parking assist−sensor — when the intuitive parking as-sist−sensors are turned on and an ob-stacle is detected in front of or behindyour vehicle, a warning appears on theright top of the rear view monitor. Fordetails, see “Intuitive parking assist” onpage 309.

The rear view monitor system is a supple-ment device intended to assist back up.When backing up, be sure to check behindand all around the vehicle visually.

CAUTION

� Never depend on the rear viewmonitor system entirely whenbacking up. Always make sureyour intended path is clear.Use caution, just as you wouldwhen backing up any vehicle.

� Never back up while looking only atthe screen. The image on thescreen is different from actualconditions. Depicted distancesbetween objects and flat surfaceswill differ from actual distance. Ifyou back up while looking only atthe screen, you may hit a vehicle, aperson or an object. When backingup, be sure to check behind and allaround the vehicle visually andwith mirrors before proceeding.

� Do not use the system when theback door is not completelyclosed.

� If the back of the vehicle is hit, theposition and mounting angle of thecamera may change. Be sure tohave the camera’s position andmounting angle checked at yourLexus dealer.

� As the camera has a water proofconstruction, do not detach, disas-semble or modify it. This maycause incorrect operation.

� If the temperature changes rapidly,such as when hot water is pouredon the vehicle in cold weather, thesystem may not operate normally.

Rear view monitor system —


292

� If the camera lens becomes dirty, itcannot transmit a clear image. Ifwater droplets, snow, or mud ad-here to the lens, rinse with waterand wipe with a soft cloth. If thelens is extremely dirty, wash it witha mild cleanser and rinse.

� Do not allow organic solvent, carwax, window cleaner or glass coatto adhere to the camera. If this hap-pens, wipe it off as soon as pos-sible.

� Use your own eyes to confirm thevehicle’s surroundings, as the dis-played image may become faint ordark, and moving images will bedistorted, or not entirely visiblewhen the outside temperature islow. When backing up, be sure tocheck behind and all around the ve-hicle visually and with mirror be-fore proceeding.

� Do not use the system in the follow-ing cases:� On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow.� When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires.� On an uneven road, such as a

slope.

NOTICE

When replacing the tires, please con-sult your Lexus dealer. If you replacethe tires, the area displayed on thescreen may change.

� Area displayed on screenImage is displayed approximately levelon screen.

� Corners of bumper


293

NOTICE

� The area detected by the camera islimited. The camera does not de-tect objects which are close to ei-ther corner of the bumper or underthe bumper.

� The area displayed on the screenmay vary according to vehicle ori-entation or road conditions.

� The rear view monitor system cam-era

The rear view monitor system camera is lo-cated on the back door as shown in the il-lustration.

In the following cases, it may become diffi-cult to see the images on the screen, evenwhen the system is functioning.

� In the dark (for example, at night)

� When the temperature near the lens ishigh or low

� When water droplets are adhering tothe camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)

� When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) is adhering to the camera

� When the camera has scratches or dirton it

� When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cameralens

NOTICE

The camera uses a special lens. Thedistance of the image that appears onthe screen differs from the actual dis-tance.


294

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked up bythe camera, the smear effect∗ peculiar tothe camera may occur.∗: Smear effect—A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when trans-mitted by the camera, the light source ap-pears to have a vertical streak above andbelow it.


295

SECTION 9

SIDE MONITOR

296

SIDE MONITOR

��

� Side monitor 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SIDE MONITOR

297

The side monitor assists the driver inchecking the safety of the vehicle’s sur-roundings by displaying an image of theview in front of and to the side of the frontpassenger side of the vehicle. The sidecamera is mounted on the underside of thefront passenger side outside rear view mir-ror.

The side monitor can be activated evenwhen the outside rear view mirrors arefolded.

CAUTION

� Always make sure to check allaround the vehicle with your owneyes when driving.

� Due to the property of the side cam-era lens, the position of and dis-tance to people or objects dis-played differs from actual positionand distance. (See page 299.)

� Never depend on the side monitoronly. Use caution just as youwould when driving any other ve-hicle.

� Never drive while looking only atthe screen as the image on thescreen is different from actualconditions. If you drive while look-ing only at the screen, you may hita person or an object, resulting inan accident. When driving, be sureto check the vehicle’s surround-ings with your own eyes and the ve-hicle’s mirrors.

� Do not use the side monitor in thefollowing cases:� On icy or slick road surfaces, or

in snow� When using tire chains or emer-

gency tires� When the hood or the front pas-

senger door is not completelyclosed

� On roads that are not flat, suchas slopes

� When the outside temperature islow, the displayed image may be-come faint or dark. Moving imageswill be distorted or not entirely vis-ible, so be sure to check the ve-hicle’s surroundings with yourown eyes and the vehicle’s mirrorswhile driving.

� When replacing the tires, pleaseconsult your Lexus dealer. If youreplace the tires, the area dis-played on the screen may change.

Side monitor —

SIDE MONITOR

298

INFORMATION� The area displayed on the screen

may vary according to vehicle sta-tus or road conditions.

� The area of the image captured bythe side camera is limited. Theside camera does not display ob-jects too close to or directly underthe corners of the bumpers on thefront passenger side.

� Due to the property of the sidecamera lens, the perceived dis-tance from images that appear onthe screen differs from the actualdistance.

� In the following cases, it may be-come difficult to see the images onthe screen, but this is not a mal-function:

� In the dark (for example, at night)

� When the temperature near thelens is high or low

� When there are water droplets onthe camera lens, or when humid-ity is high (for example, when itrains)

� When foreign matter such as mudis stuck to the side camera

� When the sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens

� The following symptoms may oc-cur, but do not indicate a malfunc-tion:

� The camera may fog up when hu-midity is high (for example, whenit rains).

� When driving at night, ambientlights such as the lights of the ve-hicles ahead and building light-ing may be reflected into theimage.

� The center or four corners of theimage may decrease in definition.

� As the procedure is the same, fol-low the instructions for navigationscreen adjustment to adjust theside monitor. (See page 36.)

� When the outside rear view mirrorsare folded, the mirror base ob-structs the side camera’s view. Inthis case, the driver cannot use theside monitor to check the area infront of the vehicle.

SIDE MONITOR

299

<Area of the image captured by the sidecamera>

Objects detected by theside camera

<Display>

Side camera capture range

The front passenger side of the vehicle isdisplayed on the screen.

� When a 3−dimensional object isnear the vehicle

If a 3−dimensional object such as an over-hanging wall is present near the vehicle,observe the following precautions to avoida collision:

— Area displayed on thescreen

SIDE MONITOR

300

WHEN THE COURSE IS NEAR AN OB-STACLE<Display>

<Vehicle status>

Overhanging wall

Wall shown on the display

On the display, it appears that the vehiclewill not hit the wall. In reality, the overhang-ing part of the wall is in the way, and the ve-hicle may collide with it. When the courseis close to an obstacle, be sure to checkthe vehicle’s surroundings with your owneyes and the vehicle’s mirrors.

SIDE MONITOR

301

� Side camera

CAUTION

� Do not hit the camera or subject itto strong impacts as this maycause its position and mountingangle to change.

� As the camera is water proof, donot detach, disassemble or modifyit. Doing so may cause incorrectoperation.

� Do not scrub the camera lensroughly or clean it with a hardbrush or abrasive cleaner. Doingso may damage the lens and ad-versely affect the image.

� As the camera cover is resin, donot allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coatingagent to adhere to it. If this hap-pens, wipe clean as soon as pos-sible.

� If the camera lens becomes dirty, itcannot transmit a clear image. Ifwater droplets, snow, or mud ad-here to the lens, rinse with waterand wipe with a soft cloth. If thelens is extremely dirty, wash it witha mild cleanser and rinse.

NOTICE

Observe the following precautions toensure that the side monitor func-tions properly:

� Do not expose the side camera tosudden temperature changes suchas by pouring hot water on the ve-hicle in cold weather.

� If the side camera is hit, its positionand mounting angle may change.Be sure to have the side camerachecked by your Lexus dealer.

� Be careful when driving on roughroads as the surface of the cameramay be damaged by flying stonesor other debris.

SIDE MONITOR

302

If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked up bythe side camera, the smear effect∗ peculiarto CCD cameras may occur.∗: Smear effect is a phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when trans-mitted by the camera, the light source ap-pears to have a vertical streak above andbelow it.

To display the side view, push the sidecamera button with the “ENGINESTART STOP” switch in ACCESSORYor IGNITION ON mode and vehiclespeed at 7 mph (12 km/h) or less.� Pushing the side camera button again

changes the screen back to the pre-viously displayed screen, such as navi-gation screen. Each push of the buttonchanges the screen as follows:

Navigation or other display

Side view monitor display

� If the side camera button is pushedwhen the rear view monitor system isdisplayed, the side monitor will appear.

— Activating the sidemonitor

SIDE MONITOR

303

� Cancelation of the side monitorIn the following situations, the side monitorwill be canceled:

When vehicle speed exceeds approxi-mately 7 mph (12 km/h)

When the side camera button is pushed

When the shift lever is shifted to “R”.

Any of the mode buttons around the dis-play, such as “MENU” is pushed.

The image captured by the side camera isdisplayed on the screen.

This image can be used to help check thesafety of the front passenger side of the ve-hicle when making a turn to that side, aswell as when starting off and stopping.

— Side monitor

SIDE MONITOR

304

� Button on the screen

1 Display area buttonSelecting this button changes betweenoverall view and enlarged front view. (Seepage 305.)2 Automatic display button

Selecting this button puts the side monitorin automatic display mode.

� Select this button to turn automatic dis-play mode on/off.

� The indicator on the button illuminatesduring automatic display mode.

(a) Automatic display modeIn addition to being able to display the sideview using the side camera button, auto-matic display mode is available. In auto-matic display mode, the side monitor is ac-tivated automatically according to vehiclespeed.

In automatic mode, the side monitor willautomatically appear in the following situa-tions:

� When the shift lever is shifted to a for-ward driving position or “N”

� When vehicle speed is reduced toapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or lesswith the shift lever in any position otherthan “R”

� Setting automatic display modeSelect the automatic display button.

Side monitor (See page 302.)

SIDE MONITOR

305

(b) Display area modesThe side view monitor system has the fol-lowing 2 display area modes:

Overall display mode:

<Overall display mode>

This default mode displays the entire viewcaptured by the camera.

<Enlarged front view mode>

This mode can be used when an enlargedfront view is needed.

� This mode is not available when theoutside rear view mirrors are folded.

� Changing display area modesSelect the display area button.

� Each time the button is selected, themode will change as follows:

Overall display mode

Enlarged front view mode

� When the outside rear view mirrors arefolded, enlarged front view mode is notavailable. (The display area button willnot be displayed on the screen.)

� If the outside rear view mirrors arefolded when the screen is in enlargedfront view mode, the screen will auto-matically change to overall displaymode. After changing to overall dis-play mode, the screen will not return toenlarged front view mode even if themirrors are extended.

SIDE MONITOR

306

CAUTION

When the side monitor is in enlargedfront view mode, the target objectmay not be shown on the screen.Even if the object is not visible, do notreadjust the steering wheel or steeroutside the guide lines until the ve-hicle passes the object as this mayresult in a collision.

In the following situations, be sure to per-form the initialization procedure:

� When the battery is disconnected

� When the side monitor changes to thesystem initialization screen due to bat-tery discharge

<System initialization screen>

— When the battery is disconnected or the systeminitialization screen appears on the display

SIDE MONITOR

307

� Initialization proceduresPerform either of the following procedures:

� With the vehicle stopped in a safeplace, turn the steering wheel all theway to the left, then all the way to theright. (It does not matter which direc-tion you turn the wheel to first.)

� Drive on a straight, uncongested roadfor approximately 5 minutes or more.

When the screen returns to the original dis-play, correction is complete.

NOTICE

If the initialization screen remains onafter performing initialization proce-dures, have the vehicle inspected byyour Lexus dealer.

Select “?” on the initialization screen toshow the help screen.

When the procedure shown on the displayhas been performed and the screen re-turns to the original display, the setting iscomplete.

If the initialization screen or the helpscreen remains on, have the system in-spected by your Lexus dealer.

Selecting “OK” will return the display tothe initialization screen.

SECTION 10

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

308


��

� Intuitive parking assist 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


309

The distance to obstacles measured bythe sensors is communicated via the dis-play and a buzzer when parallel parking ormaneuvering into a garage. Always checkthe surrounding area when using this sys-tem.

� Types of sensors

1 Front corner sensors2 Rear corner sensors3 Rear center sensors

� Setting the intuitive parking assistmode

1. Push the menu switch.The multi−information display will changemodes to electronic features control mode.

2. Push the “ENTER” switch upwardsor downwards until the intuitive park-ing assist−sensor mark appears in themulti−information display.

Intuitive parking assist —


310

3. Push the “ENTER” switch to select“ON”.The intuitive parking assist−sensor indica-tor will be displayed.

Each pushing of the switch turns the intu-itive parking assist−sensor on and off.

To turn on: Push the switch. The buzzersounds to inform the driver that the systemis operational.

To turn off: Push the switch again.

Push the menu switch to change to thenormal display.

When the sensors detect an obstacle, thegraphic is shown on the multi−informationdisplay and navigation display accordingto position and distance to the obstacle.

� Multi−information display

1 Front corner sensors operation2 Rear corner sensors operation3 Rear center sensors operation� Navigation displayWHEN THE VEHICLE IS MOVING FOR-WARDThe graphic is automatically displayedwhen an obstacle is detected. The screencan be set so that the graphic is not dis-played. (See page 390.)

WHEN THE VEHICLE IS MOVINGBACKWARDA simplified image is displayed on the rightupper corner of the screen when an ob-stacle is detected.

— Display


311

When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to theobstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.

CORNER SENSORS

Level 1 2 3 4

Displayexample −

Buzzer − Medium Fast Continuous

CENTER SENSORS

Level 1 2 3 4

Displayexample

Buzzer Slow Medium Fast Continuous

� Detection level and approximate distance to an obstacle

Level 1 2 3 4

Front cornersensors

−2.0 to 1.6 ft.(60 to 47.5

cm)

1.6 to 1.2 ft.(47.5 to 35

cm)

1.2 ft. (35cm) or less

Rear cornersensors

−1.6 to 1.2 ft.(50 to 37.5

cm)

1.2 to 0.8 ft.(37.5 to 25

cm)


Rear centersensors

4.9 to 2.0 ft.(150 to 60

cm)

2.0 to 1.5 ft.(60 to 45 cm)

1.5 to 1.2 ft.(45 to 35 cm)


INFORMATIONSettings (e.g. buzzer volume) can bechanged. (See page 390.)

— The distance display and buzzer


312

1 Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)2 Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)3 Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range ofthe sensors. Note that the sensors cannotdetect obstacles that are extremely closeto the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change de-pending on the shape of the object etc.

� Certain vehicle conditions and the sur-rounding environment may affect theability of a sensor to correctly detect anobstacle. Particular instances wherethis may occur are listed below.

� There is dirt, snow or ice on a sen-sor.

� A sensor is frozen.

� A sensor is covered in any way.

� The vehicle is leaning considerablyto one side.

� On an extremely bumpy road, on anincline, on gravel, or on grass

� The vicinity of the vehicle is noisydue to vehicle horns, motorcycleengines, air brakes of large ve-hicles, or other loud noises produc-ing ultrasonic waves.

� There is another vehicle equippedwith parking assist sensors in the vi-cinity.

� A sensor is coated with a sheet ofspray or heavy rain.

� The vehicle is equipped with a fend-er pole or radio antenna.

� Towing eyelets are installed.

� A bumper or sensor receives astrong impact.

� The vehicle is approaching a tall orright−angled curb.

� In harsh sunlight or intense coldweather.

� A non−genuine Lexus suspension(lowered suspension, etc.) isinstalled.

In addition to the examples above, thereare instances in which, because of theirshapes, signs and other objects may bejudged by a sensor to be closer than theyare.

— Detection range of thesensors

— Sensor detectioninformation


313

� The shape of the obstacle may preventa sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-lar attention to the following obstacles:

� Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

� Cotton, snow and other materialsthat absorb radio waves

� Sharply−angled objects

� Low obstacles

� Tall obstacles with upper sectionsprojecting outwards in the directionof your vehicle

CAUTION� Caution when using the intuitive

parking assist−sensorObserve the following precautions.Failing to do so may result in thevehicle being unable to be drivensafely and possibly cause an acci-dent.� Do not use the sensor at speeds

in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).� Do not attach any accessories

within the sensor range.

NOTICE

Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of wa-ter or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensormalfunctioning.

System malfunction

� An accident will affect the sensors,resulting in system failure.

� If the indicators remain on withouta beeping sound, the system maybe malfunctioning. Contact yourLexus dealer.

If an error is detected when the parkingassist−sensor is turned on, the vehiclesymbol comes on or flashes with beep-ing sounds.However, the sensors functioning properlycontinue their obstacle detection.

The parking assist−sensor failure warningdisplay is not given in either of the followingoperations:

� Changing to another screen

� Turning off the main switch for the intu-itive parking assist−sensor

— Intuitive parkingassist−sensor failurewarning


314

� When snowflakes or mud gets onthe sensors


If the failure warning does not go off evenafter the foreign matter is removed, theparking assist−sensor may be malfunc-tioning. Have it checked by your Lexusdealer.

� When the sensor is malfunctioning


If this message appears, have the parkingassist−sensor checked by your Lexusdealer.

As the parking assist−sensor might bemalfunctioning in the following cases,have it checked by your Lexus dealer.� The indicator in the instrument cluster

does not come on and a beep does notsound even when the parking assist−sensor main switch is turned on.

� The warning comes on despite no ob-stacle around the vehicle.


315

� CertificationFor vehicles sold in Canada.

This ISM device complies with Cana-dian ICES−001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a lanorme NMB−001 du Canada.

SECTION 11

SETUP

316

SETUP

Setup

� General settings 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Used for language selection and the on/off settings of operation sounds and automatic screen change.)

� Clock settings 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Used for changing time zones and the on/off settings of daylight saving time.)

� Voice settings 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Voice guidance can be set.)

� Navigation settings 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (“Home” and “Preset Destinations” can be set and edited.)

� Detailed navigation settings 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Average cruising speed, displayed screen contents, and POI icon categories can be set.)

� Telephone settings 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Bluetooth� phones can be registered.)

� Audio settings 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Settings are available for portable audio devices and Bluetooth� audio devices players.)

� Vehicle settings 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Vehicle information can be set.)

SETUP

317

Used for language selection and the on/offsettings of operation sounds and automat-ic screen change.


2. Select “General”.

3. Select the items to be set.4. Select “Save”.

SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS

On this screen, the following functions canbe performed.

General settings

SETUP

318

No. Function

1You can change the language.(See “� Selecting a language” onpage 318.)

2

Rear system lock* can be set to“On” or “Off”. (See “� Rear sys-tem lock” on page 319.)

* : Vehicles with rear seat enter-tainment system

3

“On” or “Off” can be selected forautomatic screen changes fromthe audio/air conditioner screen tothe map. When “On” is selected,the screen will automatically re-turn to the map from the audio/airconditioner screen after 20 sec-onds.

4Keyboard layout can be changed.(See “� Selecting a keyboard lay-out” on page 319.)

5Distance unit can be changed.(See “� Unit of measurement” onpage 320.)

6 “On” or “Off” can be selected forselection sounds.

7 “On” or “Off” can be selected forpointer sounds.

8 “On” or “Off” can be selected forerror sounds.

9

The strength of the pull from thebuttons to the pointer can be ad-justed. (See “� Setting a feedbackforce” on page 321.)

10Pointer shape can be changed.(See “� Selecting the pointershape” on page 321.)

11Pointer size can be changed. (See“� Changing the pointer size” onpage 322.)

12The personal data can be deleted.(See “� Delete personal data” onpage 322.)

� Selecting a languageYou can change the language.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “General” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Language”.

4. Select the desired button.The previous screen will be displayed.

5. Select “Save”.

SETUP

319

� Rear system lock (with rear seat en-tertainment system)

If the vehicle is equipped with the rear seatentertainment system, the rear seat enter-tainment system can be locked to preventrear passengers from operating the enter-tainment system.


3. Select “On” or “Off” and then select“Save”.“On”: The rear passengers cannot oper-ate the rear seat entertainment system.Only front passengers can operate thesystem.

“Off”: Both the front and rear passengerscan operate the rear seat entertainmentsystem.

� Selecting a keyboard layoutKeyboard layout can be changed.


3. Select “Keyboard Layout”.

4. Select “ABC” or “QWERTY” of“Keyboard Layout” to choose the key-board layout.5. Select “Save”.

SETUP

320

LAYOUT TYPE

� “ABC” type

� “QWERTY” type

� Unit of measurementDistance unit can be changed.


3. Select “Unit of Measurement”.

4. Select “Kilometer” or “Mile”.5. Select “Save”.

INFORMATIONThis function is available only in En-glish or Spanish. To switch lan-guage, see “� Selecting a language”on page 318.

SETUP

321

� Setting a feedback forceWhen the pointer moves close to a button,it will be automatically pulled onto that but-ton. The strength of this pull can be ad-justed.


3. Select “Feedback Force”.

4. Select “+” or “−”.5. Select “OK”.

� Selecting the pointer shapePointer shape can be changed.


3. Select “Pointer Shape”.

4. Select the desired button.

: Change to an arrow.

: Change to a left hand.

: Change to a right hand.

: Display of the pointer can beturned off. (Even if display of the pointer isturned off, the pointer will appear on themap screen as “+”.)


SETUP

322

� Changing the pointer sizePointer size can be changed.


3. Select “Pointer Size”.

4. Select the desired button.5. Select “Save”.

� Delete personal dataThe following personal data can be de-leted or returned to their default settings:

� Maintenance conditions� Maintenance information “off” set-

ting� Address book� Areas to avoid� Previous points� Route guidance� Route trace� Phonebook data� Call history data� Speed dial data� Voice tag data� Bluetooth� phone data� Volume setting� Details settingThis function is available only when the ve-hicle is not moving.

SETUP

323


3. Select “Delete Personal Data”.


5. Select “Yes”.

Used for changing time zones and the on/off settings of daylight saving time.


2. Select “Clock”.


Clock settings

SETUP

324

SCREEN FOR CLOCK SETTINGS


No. Function

1 Time zone can be changed. (See“� Time zone” on page 324.)

2 “On” or “Off” can be selected fordaylight savings time.

3 “On” or “Off” can be selected forautomatic adjustment of the clock.

� Time zoneA time zone can be selected and GMT canbe set.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Clock” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Time Zone”.

4. Select the desired time zone.If you select “Other”, adjust the zonemanually.

5. Select “OK”.

SETUP

325

� Manual clock settingWhen “Auto adjust clock” is turned “Off”,the clock can be manually adjusted.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Clock” on the “Setup”screen.Hours “+”, “−”: Push “+” to set the timeforward one hour and “−” to set the timeback one hour.Minutes “+”, “−”: Push “+” to set the timeforward one minute and “−” to set the timeback one minute.Minutes “:00”: Rounds to the nearesthour∗

∗: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00 1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00

3. Select “OK”.

Voice guidance can be set.


2. Select “Voice”.


Voice settings

SETUP

326

SCREEN FOR VOICE SETTINGS


No. Function

1The voice guidance volume canbe adjusted or switched off. (See“� Voice volume” on page 327.)

2 Voice guidance during route guid-ance can be set to “On” or “Off”.

3Voice guidance during audio sys-tem use can be set to “On” or“Off”.

4 Voice recognition talkback can beset to “On” or “Off”.

5

When “On” is selected, thespeech command system can beoperated without pressing the talkswitch more than once.

6

When using the traffic informationfunction, voice guidance can beset to “On” or “Off”. (See “� Traf-fic voice guidance” on page 327.)

7When using the XM� NavWeatherfunction, voice guidance can beset to “On” or “Off”.

8

Voice guidance projection can beset to the “Center” position or the“Driver” position. (See “� Voiceguidance speaker” on page 328.)

SETUP

327

� Voice volumeThe voice guidance volume can be ad-justed or switched off.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Voice” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select the desired level by selectingthe number.If voice guidance is not needed, select“Off” to disable the feature.

When selected the number or “Off” will behighlighted.


� Traffic voice guidanceYou can receive congestion informationthrough voice guidance while being guidedto your destination.

To turn the “Traffic Voice Guidance” on:


Then select to display page 2 of the

“Voice Settings” screen.

3. Select “On” of the “Traffic VoiceGuidance”.4. Select “Save”.

INFORMATION� This function is available only in

English. To select English, see “�Selecting a language” on page 318.

� When the “Traffic Information” in-dicator is dimmed, “Auto AvoidTraffic”, “Traffic Voice Guidance”and “Show Free Flowing Traffic”will not operate.

SETUP

328

� Voice guidance speakerThe projection position of voice guidancecan be adjusted.


3. Select “Voice Guidance Speaker”.

4. Select “Center” or “Driver”.5. Select “Save”.

Points or areas on the map can be register-ed.

On this screen, the following operationscan be performed.

No. Function

1 Sets home(See page 117.)

2 Sets preset destinations(See page 119.)

3 Sets address book(See page 122.)

4 Sets area to avoid(See page 128.)

5 Deletes previous destinations(See page 133.)

6 Detailed navigation settings(See page 329.)

Navigation settings

SETUP

329

Average cruising speed, displayed screencontents, and POI icon categories can beset.


2. Select “Navi.”.

3. Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.


Detailed navigation settings

SETUP

330

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION SET-TINGS


No. Function

1Average cruising speed can beset. (See “� Driving speeds” onpage 331.)

2 The automatic input function canbe set to “On” or “Off”.

3During route guidance, voice guid-ance for the next street name canbe set to “On” or “Off”.

4

“On” or “Off” can be selected todisplay cautionary massageswhen the route includes traffic re-strictions or seasonally restrictedroads.

5When “On” is selected, freelyflowing traffic can be shown withthe arrow.

No. Function

6

Displayed POI icon categories canbe set. (See “� POI categorychange (Select POI icons)” onpage 333.)

7

Buttons displayed on the mapscreen when “��Off” is selectedcan be set. (See “� Screen layoutfunction (“��Off” function)” onpage 334.)

8

The current vehicle position markcan be adjusted manually. Miscal-culation of the distance caused bytire replacement can also be ad-justed. (See “� Current position/tire change calibration” on page335.)

9

Display of pop−up information canbe set to “On” or “Off”. (See “�Pop−up information” on the page337.)

SETUP

331

� Driving speedsThe speed that is used for the calculationof the estimated travel time and the esti-mated arrival time can be set.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Navi.” on the “Setup”screen.3. Select “Detailed Navi. Settings” onthe “Navigation Settings” screen.

4. Select “Driving Speeds”.

5. Select or to set the averagevehicle speeds for “Residential”, “MainStreets”, and “Freeways”.To set the default speeds, select “De-fault”.

6. After setting of the desired speedsis completed, select “Save”.

INFORMATION� The displayed time to the destina-

tion is the approximate drivingtime that is calculated based on theselected speeds and the actualposition along the guidance route.

� The time shown on the screen mayvary greatly depending on prog-ress along the route, which may beaffected by conditions such astraffic jams and construction work.

� It is possible to display up to 99hours 59 minutes.

SETUP

332

� Auto avoid trafficThe guidance route automaticallychanges to another route to avoid heavycongestion.

To turn the “Auto Avoid Traffic” on:


4. Select “On” of the “Auto Avoid Traf-fic”.5. Select “Save”.

When congestion information about theguidance route has been received, ascreen will appear to ask you whether toreroute to avoid the congestion.

If you wish to reroute, select “Yes”. Anoth-er route to allow you to avoid the conges-tion will appear.

If you do not wish to reroute, select “No”.

INFORMATIONWhen the “Traffic Information” indi-cator is dimmed, “Auto Avoid Traf-fic”, “Traffic Voice Guidance” and“Show Free Flowing Traffic” will notoperate.

SETUP

333

� Show free flowing trafficFreely flowing traffic is shown with the ar-row.

To turn the “Show Free Flowing Traffic” on:


4. Select “On” of the “Show Free Flow-ing Traffic”.5. Select “Save”.

INFORMATIONWhen the “Traffic Information” indi-cator is dimmed, “Auto Avoid Traf-fic”, “Traffic Voice Guidance” and“Show Free Flowing Traffic” will notoperate.

� POI category change (Select POI icons)

Select from among the 6 icons displayedon the “Customize POI Icons” screen, sothat setting of the icons to be displayed onthe map screen can be done easily.


4. Select “Customize POI Icons”.

5. Select the category button to bechanged.

SETUP

334

6. Select the desired group.


7. Select the desired category.8. Select “OK”.

� Screen layout function (“��Off”function)

Each screen buttons and current streetname on the map screen can be displayedor hidden.


4. Select “��Off” Function”.

5. Select the button to be turned off.The button becomes dimmed.To set the default, select “Default”.


SETUP

335

� Current position/tire change cal-ibration

The current vehicle position mark can beadjusted manually. Miscalculation of thedistance caused by tire replacement canalso be adjusted.


4. Select “Calibration”.

5. Select the desired button.

INFORMATIONFor additional information on the ac-curacy of a current vehicle position,see “Limitations of the navigationsystem” on page 393.

POSITION/DIRECTION CALIBRATIONWhen driving, the current vehicle positionmark will be automatically corrected byGPS signals. If GPS reception is poor dueto location, you can manually adjust thecurrent vehicle position mark.

1. Select “Position / Direction”.

2. Select the 8 directional button tomove the cursor to the desired pointon the map.3. Select “OK”.

SETUP

336

4. Select either the or to ad-

just the direction of the current vehicleposition mark.5. Select “OK”.The map will be displayed.

TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATIONThe tire change calibration function will beused when replacing the tires. This func-tion will adjust the miscalculation causedby the circumference difference betweenthe old and new tires. If this procedure isnot performed when the tires are replaced,the current vehicle position mark may beincorrectly displayed.

To perform a distance calibration pro-cedure, select “Tire Change” on the“Calibration” screen.The message appears and the quick dis-tance calibration is automatically started.A few seconds later, a map will be dis-played.

SETUP

337

� Pop−up informationWhen the “Pop−up information” is turnedon, the pop−up information will be dis-played.


4. Select “Pop−up Information”.

5. Select “On” or “Off”.6. Select “Save”.

When the “Pop−up Information” is turnedoff, the following messages will not be dis-played.

This message appears when the system isin the POI mode and the map scale is over0.5 miles (1 km).

The message appears when the map isswitched to the dual map screen mode.

SETUP

338

“Telephone settings” can be changedon the “Phone settings” screen.



Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.

You can adjust the voice and ring vol-ume.

1. Select “Volume”.

2. Change each setting according tothe following procedures.3. When you complete all settings, se-lect “Save”.

Automatic volume settings for highspeedThe system will automatically increase thevolume by one step up when the speed ex-ceeds 50 mph (80 km/h).

Telephone settings — — Volume setting

SETUP

339

� Voice volume setting1. Select “Voice Volume”.

2. Select “–” or “+” to adjust the voicevolume.3. Select “OK”.

� Ring volume setting1. Select “Ring Volume”.

2. Select “–” or “+” to adjust the ringvolume.3. Select “OK”.

� Initializing the settingsYou can initialize the settings.1. Select “Default”.


SETUP

340

“Manage phone” is accessed from the“Connect Phone” screen.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.

3. Select “Manage Phone”.


� Registering a Bluetooth� phone

1. Select “(add new)” to register yourcellular phone to the system.

2. When this screen is displayed, inputthe passcode displayed on the screeninto the phone.For the operation of the phone, see themanual that comes with your cellularphone.

If you want to cancel it, select “Cancel”.

— Manage phone

SETUP

341

3. When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.You do not need to enter the phone in caseof using the same one.

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try again.

When another Bluetooth� device isconnected

When another Bluetooth� device is cur-rently connected, this screen is displayed.

If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

INFORMATIONWhen you register your phone,Bluetooth� audio will disconnect. Itwill reconnect automatically whenyou finish registration. It will not bereconnected depending on the phoneyou are using.

SETUP

342

You can also register a new Bluetooth�phone in the following way.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Manage Phone”.

4. Select “Options”.

5. Select “New Phone”.

6. Select “(empty)” to register yourcellular phone to the system.The following operations are the sameas the operation after you select “(addnew)”.

SETUP

343

� Selecting a Bluetooth� phoneIn case you register more than oneBluetooth� phone, you need to choosea favorite one.You can select the Bluetooth� phonefrom a maximum of 4 numbers.“(add new)” is displayed when you havenot registered a Bluetooth� phone yet.

Although you can register up to 4Bluetooth� phones in the system, only oneBluetooth� phone can function at a time.

1. Select the phone to connect.The Bluetooth� mark is displayed whenyou connect the phone.

2. The “Connect Bluetooth*” screen isdisplayed.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

3. When the result message is dis-played, you can use the Bluetooth�phone.

SETUP

344

When you connect the phone whileBluetooth� audio is playing





Setting the handsfree powerYou can select the state of “HandsfreePower”.

The state changes between “On” and“Off” every time you select “HandsfreePower”.For the “Handsfree Power”, see“Changing the handsfree power” onpage 370.

SETUP

345

� Editing the Bluetooth� phoneYou can see the information of theBluetooth� phone on the system oredit.“Device Name”

The name of Bluetooth�. . . . . phone which is displayed onthe screen. You can change itinto a desired name.

If you change a device name,the name registered in yourcellular phone is not changed.

“Device Address”The address peculiar to the. . . . . system. You cannot change it.

If you have registered twoBluetooth� phones with thesame device name and youcannot distinguish one fromthe other, refer to it.


2. Select “Edit Phones”.

3. Select the phone to edit.

4. This screen is displayed.If you want to change the device name,select “Edit”.

SETUP

346

5. Use the software keyboard to inputthe device name.

6. Confirm the device name and select“OK”.

� Deleting a Bluetooth� phone


2. Select “Remove Phones”.

SETUP

347

3. Select the desired phone or select“Select All”, then select “Delete”.You can select multiple phones and deletethem at the same time.


INFORMATIONWhen you delete a Bluetooth�phone, the phonebook data will bedeleted at the same time.


You can operate “Connect Phone” by giv-ing a command.

“Connect Phone” includes “Select Phone”,“Add New Phone” and “Handsfree PowerOff” (On).

The operating procedure is similar to othervoice recognition. (For the operation ofvoice recognition, see “Speech commandsystem” on page 49.)

When you select the command of “AddNew Phone”, you must carry out the follow-ing operation on the screen.

SETUP

348

INFORMATIONPhonebook data is managed for ev-ery registered phone. When anoth-er phone is connecting, you can notread the registered data.

“Phonebook” is accessed from the“Phonebook Settings” screen.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.

3. Select “Phonebook”.

Please do each setting from thisscreen.

“Setting the phonebook” is accessedfrom the “Contacts” screen.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Phonebook”.

4. Select “Manage Contacts”.


— Phonebook — Setting the phonebook

SETUP

349

You can also display the “Contacts”screen in the following way.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Contacts”.


5. Select “Manage Contacts”.

� Transferring a phone numberYou can transfer the phone numbers inyour Bluetooth� phone to the system.The phonebook manages a maximumof 4 phonebooks in all. Up to 1000 per-son’s data (up to 3 numbers a person)can be registered in total of phone-books.Transfer it while the engine is running.

1. Select “Transfer Contacts”.

2. Select “Replace Contacts” or “AddContacts”.In case that the phonebook containsphonebook data, this screen is displayed.

SETUP

350

3. Transfer the phonebook data to thesystem using the Bluetooth� phone.This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel it, select “Cancel”. If the transfer-ring is interrupted on the way, the phone-book data transferred until then can bememorized in the system.

When you have selected “Replace Con-tacts”:If your cellular phone does not supportPBAP or OPP service, you can not use thisfunction.

If your phone supports PBAP service, youcan transfer the phonebook data withoutoperating your phone.

If your phone does not support PBAP ser-vice, you must transfer the phonebookdata by operating your phone.

When you have selected “Add Con-tacts”:If your cellular phone does not supportOPP service, you can not use this function.

You can transfer the phonebook data onlyby operating your phone.

4. In case that you have selected “AddContacts”, this screen is displayed.If you want to transfer another phone-book, select “Yes”.

SETUP

351




INFORMATIONBluetooth� audio will disconnectduring transfer on phonebook data.In this case, it will reconnect auto-matically when data transfer finish-es. (It will not be reconnected de-pending the phone you are using.)

� Registering the phonebook dataYou can register the phonebook data.Up to 3 numbers per person can be reg-istered.

1. Select “New Contact”.

2. Use the software keyboard to inputthe name and select “OK”.

SETUP

352

3. Input the phone number and select“OK”.If you want to use the tone signal afterthe phone number, input the tone signaltoo.

4. Select the phone type.

5. When two or less numbers in totalare registered to this contact, thisscreen is displayed.When you want to add a number to thiscontact, select “Yes”.

SETUP

353

� Editing the phonebook dataYou can register the phone number in“Phone#1”, “Phone#2” and “Phone#3”separately.

1. Select “Edit Contacts”.

2. Select the data you want to edit.

3. Select “Edit” for the desired nameor number.4. Edit the name or the number. (See “�Registering the phonebook data” onpage 351.)5. When you complete the edit, select“Save”.

SETUP

354

You can also display the “Edit Contact”screen in the following ways.

From “Contact Data” screen1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Contacts”.4. Select the desired data from the list.


6. Select “Edit Contact”.

From “Call History” screen1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Call History”.4. Select the desired number from thelist.

5. Select “Add Contact” or “UpdateContact”.

6. In case that you have selected “Up-date Contact”, this screen is displayed.Select the desired data from the list.

SETUP

355

� Deleting the phonebook dataYou can delete the data.When you release your car, delete allyour data on the system.

1. Select “Delete Contacts”.

2. Select the desired data or select“Select All”, then select “Delete”.You can select multiple data and deletethem at the same time.


SETUP

356

You can also delete it in the followingway.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Contacts”.4. Select the desired data from the list.


6. Select “Delete Contact”.


INFORMATIONWhen you delete a Bluetooth�phone, the phonebook data will bedeleted at the same time.

SETUP

357

“Speed dials setting” is accessed fromthe “Speed Dials” screen.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Phonebook”.

4. Select “Manage Speed Dials”.


You can also display the “Speed Dials”screen in the following way.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Speed Dials”.


— Speed dials setting

SETUP

358

� Registering the speed dialYou can register the desired phonenumber from phonebook. Up to 18numbers per phone can be registered.

1. Select “New Speed Dial”.

2. Select the data you want to register.

3. Select the desired phone number.

4. Select the button you want to regis-ter in.

SETUP

359

5. If you select a button you registeredbefore, this screen is displayed.Select “Yes” if you want to replace it.

6. When this screen is displayed, theoperation is complete.

You can also register the speed dial inthe following ways.From “Speed Dial” screen1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Speed Dials”.

4. Select “(add new)”.

5. Select “Yes” to set new speed dial.

SETUP

360


7. Select the desired phone number.

From “Contact Data” screen1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Contacts”.4. Select the desired data from the list.


6. Select “Set Speed Dial”.

SETUP

361

7. This screen is displayed.The following operations are the sameas the operation when you operate itfrom “Setup” screen.

� Editing the speed dialYou can edit the speed dial.

1. Select “Edit Speed Dials”.

2. Select the button you want to edit.


SETUP

362

4. Use the software keyboard to inputthe name.


� Deleting the speed dialYou can delete the speed dial.

1. Select “Delete Speed Dials”.


SETUP

363


You can delete the call history.

1. Select “Delete Call History”.

2. Select the desired history to delete.

— Deleting call history

SETUP

364



You can also delete the call history inthe following way.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Call History”.


5. This screen is displayed.The following operations are the sameas the operation when you operate itfrom “Setup” screen.You can similarly operate other call his-tory.

SETUP

365

“Setting the voice tag” is done by dis-playing “Voice Tags” screen.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Phonebook”.

4. Select “Manage Voice Tags”.


You can also display “Voice Tags”screen in the following way.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Contacts”.


5. Select “Manage Voice Tags”.

— Setting the voice tag

SETUP

366

� Registering the voice tagYou can register a voice tag for up to 20numbers.

1. Select “New Voice Tag”.


3. Select “� REC”, and record a voicetag.

4. Select “� Play” to play the voicetag.When you complete the voice tag registra-tion, select “OK”.

INFORMATIONWhen you use the voice tag, do notchange the language setting fromthe language setting used when reg-istering.If they are different, the voice recog-nition can’t recognize the voice tagthat you have registered.

SETUP

367

You can also register the voice tag inthe following way.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Info./Phone”.2. Select “Phone”.3. Select “Contacts”.4. Select the desired data from the list.


6. Select “Set Voice Tag”.

7. This screen is displayed.The following operations are the sameas the operation when you operate itfrom “Setup” screen.

SETUP

368

� Editing the voice tag

1. Select “Edit Voice Tags”.

2. Select the data you want to edit.

3. This screen is displayed.The following operations are the sameas the operation when you register thevoice tag.

� Deleting the voice tag

1. Select “Delete Voice Tags”.



SETUP

369

You can confirm and change theBluetooth� settings.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.

3. Select “Bluetooth*”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.

4. This screen is displayed.

The information displays the followingitems.

“Device Name”The name in the Bluetooth�. . . . . network. You can change it.

“Passcode”The password when you regis-. . . . . ter your cellular phone in thesystem. You can change it.

“Device Address”The address peculiar to the. . . . . system. You can not change it.If the same device name isdisplayed on the screen ofyour phone, refer to it.

If you want to change the settings, referto the following pages.When you change the settings, select“Save” after changing them.

— Bluetooth�

SETUP

370

� Changing the Bluetooth� settingsYou can change the Bluetooth� set-tings according to the following proce-dures.

Changing the handsfree powerThe “Handsfree Power” display showsthe following state.When “Handsfree Power” is “On”:

The Bluetooth� phone is automaticallyconnected when you turn the ignition toACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

When “Handsfree Power” is “Off”:The Bluetooth� phone is disconnected,and the system will not connect to it nexttime.

You can select the state of “HandsfreePower”.On: The auto connection is turned on.Off: The auto connection is turned off.You can not change the state from “On”into “Off” while driving.

1. Select “Handsfree Power”.

2. Select “On” or “Off”.

SETUP

371

3. Select “Save”.In case that the state of “HandsfreePower” is changed from “Off” into“On”, Bluetooth� connection will be-gin.When you connect the phone whileBluetooth� audio is playing


Editing the device name

1. Select “Edit” of “Device Name”.


INFORMATIONThe device names are commonBluetooth� audio and Bluetooth�phone.If you change the device name of thephone, the device name of the audiowill change at same time.However, passcodes can be set sep-arately.

SETUP

372

Editing the passcode

1. Select “Edit” of “Passcode”.

2. Input a passcode and select “OK”.

� Initializing the Bluetooth� settingsYou can initialize the settings.

1. Select “Default”.

2. Select “Yes”.If the state of “Handsfree Power” ischanged from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth�connection will begin.

SETUP

373

If you connect a phone whileBluetooth� audio is playing


You can do the detail settings.1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Phone”.

3. Select “Details”.

4. Do each setting according to the fol-lowing procedures.5. When you complete each setting,select “Save”.

— Details

SETUP

374

� Incoming call display

You can select the method of the in-coming call display.

1. Select “Incoming Call DisplayMode”.

2. Select “Full Screen” or “DropDown”.“Full Screen” mode

When a call is received, the. . . . . Hands−free screen is dis-played and you can operate iton the screen.

“Drop Down” modeThe message is displayed on. . . . . the upper side of the screen.You can only operate thesteering switch.

SETUP

375

� The Bluetooth� connection statusat start up

When the “ENGINE START STOP”switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITIONON mode and the Bluetooth� is auto-matically connected, the connectioncheck is displayed.When “Display Phone Status” is “On”,this status is displayed.When “Display Phone Status” is “Off”,this status is not displayed.

1. Select “Display Phone Status”.

2. Select “On” or “Off”.

SETUP

376

� Initializing the settingsYou can initialize the settings.

1. Select “Default”.


The portable player to connect can beselected. The registered audio informa-tion can be confirmed and edited.� Selecting a portable playerIf you register a second portable player,either one can be selected for connec-tion.


2. Select “Audio” on “Setup” screen.

Audio settings —— Select portable player

SETUP

377

3. Select “Select Portable Player” on“Audio setting” screen.You can select from a maximum of twoBluetooth� portable players.

“Empty” is displayed when you have notregistered a portable player yet. TheBluetooth� mark is displayed when youchoose the portable player.

4. Select desired portable player andthen select “OK”.Although you can register up to two porta-ble players in the system, only one porta-ble player can function at a time.

� Displaying Bluetooth� informationYou can see or change the informationof the portable player on the system.“Device Name”

The name of Bluetooth� portable. . . player which is displayed on thescreen. You can change it into a de-sired name.

“Device Address”The address peculiar to the system. . . . You cannot change it. If you have reg-istered two Bluetooth� portable play-ers with the same device name andyou cannot distinguish one from theother, refer to it.

“Connection Method”The connection method can be. . . switched between “From Vehicle” and“From Portable Player”.

Select the desired portable player andthen select “Portable Player Info”.

SETUP

378

� Changing a device nameYou can change a device name. Even ifyou change a device name, the nameregistered in your portable player is notchanged.

1. Select “Portable Player Info” on“Select Portable Player” screen.

2. Select “Edit” for “Device Name” on“Portable Player Information” screen.


� Selecting Connection methodThe connection method can be se-lected.From Vehicle: Connect the audio sys-tem to the portable player.From Portable Player: Connect the por-table player to the audio system.

Select desired connection method“From Vehicle” or “From PortablePlayer” and then select “Save”.

INFORMATIONIf the connection method is set to“From Portable Player”, “AutoBluetooth∗ Connect” cannot beselected.

∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG.Inc.

SETUP

379

The Bluetooth� audio settings can beset.� Registering your portable player

1. Select “Bluetooth∗ Audio Setting”on “Audio Settings” screen.

2. Select “Register” of “Bluetooth∗

Audio” on “BT Audio Settings” screen.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG.Inc.

3. When this screen is displayed, enterthe passcode displayed on the screeninto the portable player.For the operation of the portable player,see the manual that comes with it.

If you want to cancel the entry, select “Can-cel”.

4. When the connection is complete,this screen is displayed.You do not need to enter the portable play-er in case of using the same one.

When this screen is displayed, follow theguidance on the screen to try connectionagain.

— Setting Bluetooth� audio

SETUP

380

When another Bluetooth� device isconnectedIf you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.

INFORMATIONIf the device corresponds with bothBluetooth� phone and Bluetooth�audio, register and connect theBluetooth� phone first or aconnection failure may occur whenregistering the Bluetooth� audio.

(a) Removing a Bluetooth� audio

1. Select “Remove” of “Bluetooth∗

Audio” on “BT Audio Settings” screen.

2. Select the portable player you wantto delete and select “OK”.

3. Select “Yes” to unregister the se-lected portable player.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG.Inc.

SETUP

381

If the selected portable player is in use, thisscreen will appear. Select “Yes”. The sys-tem will disconnect the portable player andremove it.

(b) Connecting Bluetooth� audioAUTOMATICALLY

Select “On” for “Auto Bluetooth∗ connect”to activate the automatic connection forthe Bluetooth�. Always set it to this modeand leave the Bluetooth� portable player ina condition where connection can beestablished. The “Auto Bluetooth∗

Connect” cannot be selected if theconnection method is set to “FromPortable Player”.∗: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG.Inc.

SETUP

382

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switchis in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ONmode, the selected portable player will beautomatically connected and the connec-tion result is displayed.

MANUALLYWhen the auto connection failed or turnedoff, you have to connect Bluetooth� manu-ally.

For the manual operation, see page 230.

(c) Changing the passcodeThe passcode for registering your por-table player on the system. You canchange this to 4 to 8 digit number ofyour choice. The default is “0000”.

1. Select “Edit” of “Passcode” on “BTAudio Settings” screen.

2. Enter the new 4−8 digits passcodeand select “OK”.

Each time you select , an input digit

is deleted.

SETUP

383

(d) Changing the device nameYou can change a device name. Even ifyou change a device name, the nameregistered your portable player is notchanged.

1. Select “Edit” of “Device Name” on“BT Audio Settings” screen.

2. Enter the new device name and se-lect “OK”.

INFORMATIONThe device names are commonBluetooth� audio and Bluetooth�phone.If you change the device name of theaudio, the device name of the phonewill change at same time.However, passcodes can be setseparately.

(e) Initializing the Bluetooth� audiosettingsYou can initialize the settings.

1. Select “Default” on “BT Audio Set-tings” screen.


SETUP

384

When the navigation system is turned on,the “Information” screen displays when it istime to replace a part or certain compo-nents. (See page 31.)


2. Select “Vehicle”.

3. Select “Maintenance”.

� Setting maintenance information (Seepage 385.)

� Setting dealer (See page 386.)

Vehicle settings —— Maintenance

SETUP

385

(a) Maintenance information setting1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup”screen.3. Select “Maintenance” on the “Ve-hicle Settings” screen.

4. Select the desired button.For details of each button, see “INFORMA-TION ITEMS” on page 385.

“Delete All”: To cancel all conditionswhich have been inputted.

“Reset All”: To reset the item which hassatisfied a condition.

“Set Dealer”: To register dealer informa-tion. (See “ (b) Dealer setting” on page386.)

“Dealer Info.”: To edit dealer information.(See “ (b) Dealer setting” on page 386.)

“Reminder”: When this button is se-lected, the indicator is illuminated. Thesystem is set to give maintenance informa-tion with the “Information” screen. (Seepage 31.)

When the vehicle needs to be serviced, thebutton color will change to orange.

INFORMATION ITEMS“Engine oil”: Replace engine oil

“Oil filter”: Replace engine oil filter

“Rotation”: Rotate tires

“Tires”: Replace tires

“Battery”: Replace battery

“Brake pad”: Replace brake linings

“Wipers”: Replace wiper blades

“Coolant”: Replace engine coolant

“Brake oil”: Replace brake fluid

“Trans. fluid”: Replace transmission fluid

“Service”: Scheduled maintenance

“Air filter”: Replace air filter

“Personal”: New information items canbe created separately from provided ones.

SETUP

386

5. Input the conditions.“Date”: The next maintenance date can beinput.

“Distance”: The driving distance until thenext maintenance check can be input.

“Delete”: To cancel the date and distanceconditions.

“Reset”: To reset the date and distanceconditions.6. Select “OK”.The screen then returns to the “Mainte-nance” screen.

INFORMATION� For scheduled maintenance infor-

mation, please refer to the “War-ranty and Services Guide/Owner’sManual Supplement/ScheduledMaintenance”.

� Depending on driving or road con-ditions, the actual date and dis-tance may differ from the storeddate and distance in the system.

(b) Dealer settingIt is possible to register a dealer in the sys-tem. With dealer information registered,route guidance to the dealer is available.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup”screen.3. Select “Maintenance” on the “Ve-hicle Settings” screen.

4. Select “Set Dealer”.

5. If the dealer has not been registered,enter the location of the dealer in thesame way as for a destination search.(See “Destination search” on page 66.)

When “Set Dealer” registration is finished,the “Dealer” screen will be displayed.

SETUP

387

6. Select “Edit” for the item you wantto change.“Dealer”: To enter the name of a dealer.(See page 387.)

“Contact”: To enter the name of a dealermember. (See page 387.)

“Location”: To set a location. (See page388.)

“Phone #”: To set a telephone number.(See page 388.)

“Delete Dealer”: To delete the dealer in-formation displayed on the screen.

“Enter ”: To set the displayed dealer asa destination. (See “Starting route guid-ance” on page 86.)

� To edit “Dealer” or “Contact”

1. Select “Edit” of “Dealer” or “Con-tact”.

2. Enter the name using the alphanu-meric keys.Up to 32 characters can be entered.

3. Select “OK”.The previous screen will be displayed.

SETUP

388

� To edit “Location”


2. Select the 8 directional button tomove the cursor to the desired pointon the map.3. Select “OK”.The previous screen will be displayed.

� To edit “Phone #” (telephone num-ber)

1. Select “Edit” of “Phone #”.

2. Enter the number using numberkeys.3. Select “OK”.The previous screen will be displayed.

SETUP

389

Vehicle settings can be changed.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “Vehicle Customization”

4. Select the setting to be changed.Various settings can be changed. For alist of the settings that can be changed,see the vehicle owner’s manual.5. After changing the settings, select“Save”. A message indicating that thesettings are being saved will appear.Do not perform any other operationswhile this message is displayed.

CAUTION

When performing the customizationprocedure, ensure that there is suffi-cient ventilation in the vehicle andsurrounding area. If there is insuffi-cient ventilation, exhaust gases maycollect and enter the vehicle. Ex-haust gases include harmful carbonmonoxide (CO) and inhaling themmay lead to death or a serious healthhazard.

INFORMATIONStop the vehicle in a safe place, setthe parking brake and put the shift le-ver in “P”. To avoid discharging thebattery, perform the customizationprocedure with the engine running.

— Vehicle customization

SETUP

390

The volume of the beeps and turning on oroff of the display can be set.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup”screen.

3. Select “LEXUS Park Assist”.

4. Select the desired button.5. Select “Save”.

� Setting an alert volumeThe alert volume can be adjusted.

1. Push the “MENU” button and select“Setup”.2. Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup”screen.3. Select “LEXUS Park Assist” on the“Vehicle Settings” screen.

4. Select the desired button.The volume has 5 levels, increasing withhigher value.


—Lexus parking assistsetting

SETUP

391

� Setting a parking sonar display“On” or “Off” can be selected for parkingsonar display.


4. Select the desired button.5. Select “Save”.Vehicles with parking assist monitor—

Although “Off” is selected, if the obstacleis detected during the Lexus parking assistmonitoring, the warning appears on theright top of the screen.

� Setting a display and tone indica-tion

Back sensors display and tone indicationcan be set.


4. Select “Rear”.Selecting “Rear” to switch the distance forthe back sensors display and tone indica-tion, from long distance to short distance,or from short distance to long distance.


SECTION 12

APPENDIX

392

APPENDIX

Appendix

� Limitations of the navigation system 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Map database information and updates 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX

393

This navigation system calculates thecurrent vehicle position using satellitesignals, various vehicle signals, mapdata, etc. However, the accurate posi-tion may not be shown depending onthe satellite condition, road configura-tion, vehicle condition or other circum-stances.The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-ment of Defense provides an accurate cur-rent vehicle position, normally using 4 ormore satellites, and in some case 3 satel-lites. The GPS system has a certain levelof inaccuracy. While the navigation sys-tem will compensate for this most of thetime, occasional positioning errors of up to300 feet (100 m) can and should be expec-ted. Generally, position errors will be cor-rected within a few seconds.

When your vehicle is receiving signalsfrom the satellites, the “GPS” mark ap-pears at the top left of the screen.

The GPS signal may be physically ob-structed, leading to inaccurate vehicleposition on the map display. Tunnels, tallbuildings, trucks, or even the placement ofobjects on the instrument panel may ob-struct the GPS signals.

The GPS satellites may not send signalsdue to repairs or improvements beingmade to them.

Even when the navigation system is re-ceiving clear GPS signals, the vehicleposition may not be shown accurately orinappropriate route guidance may occur insome cases.

NOTICE

The installation of window tintingmay obstruct the GPS signals. Mostwindow tinting contains some metal-lic content that will interfere with GPSsignal reception of the antenna in theinstrument panel. We advise againstthe use of window tinting on vehiclesequipped with navigation systems.

Limitations of the navigation system

APPENDIX

394

(a) Accurate current vehicle positionmay not be shown in the followingcases:� When driving on a small angled Y−

shaped road.

� When driving on a winding road.

� When driving on a slippery road suchas in sand, gravel, snow, etc.

� When driving on a long straight road.

� When motorway and surface streetsrun in parallel.

� After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.

� When a long route is searched duringhigh speed driving.

� When driving without setting the cur-rent position calibration correctly.

� After repeating a change of direction bygoing forward and backward, or turningon a turntable in the parking lot.

� When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.

� When a roof carrier is installed.

� When driving with tire chains installed.

� When the tires are worn.

� After replacing a tire or tires.

� When using tires that are smaller orlarger than the factory specifications.

� When the tire pressure in any of thefour tires is not correct.

INFORMATIONIf your vehicle cannot receive GPSsignals, you can correct the currentposition manually. For informationon setting the current position cal-ibration, see page 335.

(b) Inappropriate route guidance mayoccur in the following cases:� When turning at an intersection off the

designated route guidance.

� If you set more than one destination butskip any of them, auto reroute will dis-play a route returning to the destinationon the previous route.

� When turning at an intersection forwhich there is no route guidance.

� When passing through an intersectionfor which there is no route guidance.

� During auto reroute, the route guid-ance may not be available for the nextturn to the right or left.

� It may take a long time to operate autoreroute during high speed driving. Inauto reroute, a detour route may beshown.

� After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.

� An unnecessary U−turn may be shownor announced.

� A location may have multiple namesand the system will announce one ormore.

� Some routes may not be searched.

� If the route to your destination includesgravel, unpaved roads or alleys, theroute guidance may not be shown.

� Your destination point might be shownon the opposite side of the street.

� When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time or season or otherreasons.

� The road and map data stored in yournavigation system may not be com-plete or may not be the latest version.

APPENDIX

395

After replacing a tire, implement the op-eration described in the “TIRECHANGE CALIBRATION”. (See page336.)This navigation system uses tire turningdata and is designed to work with factory−specified tires for your vehicle. Installingtires that are larger or smaller than the orig-inally equipped diameter may cause inac-curate display of the vehicle’s position.The tire pressure also affects the diameterof the tires so please make sure the tirepressure of all four tires is correct.

This system uses the maps of DENSO.

© 2008 DENSO CORPORATION

© 2007 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.

© 2007 Tele Atlas North America, Inc.All rights reserved. This material is pro-prietary and the subject of copyrightprotection and other intellectual prop-erty rights owned by or licensed to TeleAtlas North America, Inc. The use ofthis material is subject to the terms ofa license agreement. You will be heldliable for any unauthorized copying ordisclosure of this material.

Data by infoUSA Copyright © 2007, AllRights Reserved.

© 2007 VISA Corporation

Copyright © CoStar Realty InformationInc.

The Bullseye Design is a registeredtrademark of Target Brands, Inc.

Map database informationand updates —

APPENDIX

396

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTPLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENTCAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENTFOR YOUR COPY OF THE SPATIALMAP DATABASE, INCLUDING LOCA-TION CODES AND RELATED PROD-UCTS (COLLECTIVELY, THE “DATA-BASE”), USED IN THE NAVIGATIONSYSTEM. BY USING THE NAVIGA-TION SYSTEM AND THE DATA-BASE, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREETO BE BOUND BY ALL TERMS ANDCONDITIONS SET FORTH BELOW.

LICENSE GRANTDENSO CORPORATION (“DENSO”),as a licensed distributor of theDATABASE, grants to you anon−exclusive, non−perpetual licenseto use your copy of the DATABASE foryour personal use or for your use inyour business’ internal operations andnot for any other purpose. This licensedoes not include the right to grantsub−licenses.

OWNERSHIPThe DATABASE and the copyrightsand intellectual property andneighboring rights therein are ownedby Tele Atlas North America, Inc.(“TANA”) and its licensors. ThisAgreement does not transfer any titleor interest in the DATABASE, exceptfor the license to use the DATABASEaccording and subject to the terms andconditions of this Agreement. Youshall not alter, obscure or remove anycopyright notices, trademark notices orother restrictive legends relating to theDATABASE.

The DATABASE comprises confiden-tial and proprietary information andmaterials of TANA. Accordingly, youshall hold the DATABASE in confi-dence and trust. You shall take rea-sonable steps to protect the DATA-BASE from misappropriation or mis-use. You shall not extract stand−alonedata from or publish any part of the DA-TABASE without the prior written con-sent of TANA and its licensors.

LIMITATIONS ON USEThe DATABASE is restricted for use inthe specific system for which it wascreated. Except to the extent explicitlypermitted by mandatory laws, you maynot extract or reutilize any portion ofthe contents of the DATABASE, norreproduce, copy, duplicate, modify,adapt, translate, disassemble,decompile, or reverse engineer anyportion of the DATABASE.

TRANSFERYou may not transfer the DATABASEto third parties, except together withthe system for which it was created,provided that you do not retain anycopy of the DATABASE, and providedthat the transferee agrees to all termsand conditions of this AGREEMENT.

APPENDIX

397

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTYTHE DATABASE IS PROVIDED ONAN “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTSBASIS” AND DENSO AND TANA(AND THEIR LICENSORS AND SUP-PLIERS) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EX-PRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDINGBUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF NON−INFRINGE-MENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SAT-ISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY,TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTIC-ULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL ORWRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMA-TION PROVIDED BY DENSO ORTANA (OR ANY OF THEIR LICEN-SORS, AGENTS, EMPLOYEES ORTHIRD PARTY PROVIDERS) SHALLCREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOUARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ONANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFORMA-TION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WAR-RANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CON-DITION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITYIN NO EVENT SHALL DENSO ORTANA (OR THEIR LICENSORS ORSUPPLIERS) BE LIABLE FOR ANYINCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,SPECIAL, INDIRECT OREXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISINGOUT OF THIS AGREEMENT ORYOUR USE OF THE DATABASE,INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OFCOVER, LOSS OF USE ORBUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THELIKE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHERTHE PARTY WAS ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

IN NO EVENT WILL THE TOTALLIABILITY OF DENSO OR TANA (ORTHEIR LICENSORS ORSUPPLIERS) EXCEED THEAMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR THEDATABASE.

WARNINGSThe DATABASE comprises facts andinformation from government andother sources reflectingcircumstances in existence before youreceived the DATABASE, which maycontain errors and omissions.Accordingly, the DATABASE maycontain inaccurate or incompleteinformation due to the passage of time,changing circumstances, and due tothe nature of the sources used. TheDATABASE does not include or reflectinformation relating to, among otherthings, neighborhood safety; lawenforcement; emergency assistance;construction work; road or laneclosures; vehicle or speed restrictions;road slope or grade; bridge height,weight or other limits; road or trafficconditions; special events; trafficcongestion; or travel time.

APPENDIX

398

U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTSIf you are an agency, department, orother entity of the United StatesGovernment, or funded in whole or inpart by the United States Government,then use, duplication, reproduction,release, modification, disclosure ortransfer of this commercial product andaccompanying documentation, isrestricted in accordance with theLIMITED or RESTRICTED rights asdescribed in DFARS252.227−7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995)(DOD commercial computer softwaredefinition), DFARS 227.7202−1 (DODpolicy on commercial computersoftware), FAR 52.227−19 (JUN 1987)(commercial computer softwareclause for civilian agencies), DFARS252.227−7015 (NOV 1995) (DODtechnical data − commercial itemsclause); FAR 52.227−14 Alternates I,II, and III (JUN 1987) (civilian agencytechnical data and noncommercialcomputer software clause); and/orFAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212(commercial item acquisitions), asapplicable. In case of conflict betweenany of the FAR and DFARS provisionslisted herein and this Agreement, theconstruction that provides greaterlimitations on the Government’s rightsshall control.

Contractor/manufacturer is Tele AtlasNorth America, Inc., 11 LafayetteStreet, Lebanon, NH 03766−1445.Phone: 603.643.0330. The DATA-BASE is ©1984−2007 by Tele AtlasNorth America, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RE-SERVED. For purpose of any publicdisclosure provision under any federal,state or local law, it is agreed that theDATABASE is a trade secret and a pro-prietary commercial product and notsubject to disclosure.

If you are an agency, department, orother entity of any State government,the United States Government or anyother public entity or funded in whole orin part by the United States Govern-ment, then you hereby agree to protectthe DATABASE from public disclosureand to consider the DATABASE ex-empt from any statute, law, regulation,or code, including any Sunshine Act,Public Records Act, Freedom of Infor-mation Act, or equivalent, which per-mits public access and/or reproductionor use of the Licensed Products. In theevent that such exemption is chal-lenged under any such laws, thisAgreement shall be consideredbreached and any and all right to retainany copies or to use of the DATABASEshall be terminated and considered im-mediately null and void. Any copies ofthe DATABASE held by you shall im-mediately be destroyed. If any court ofcompetent jurisdiction considers thisclause void and unenforceable, inwhole or in part, for any reason, thisAgreement shall be considered termi-nated and null and void, in its entirety,and any and all copies of the DATA-BASE shall immediately be destroyed.

APPENDIX

399

END USER TERMSThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, andis subject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you,on the one hand, and DENSO COR-PORATION (“DENSO”) and its licen-sors (including their licensors and sup-pliers) on the other hand.

� 2007 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.

The Data for areas of Canada includesinformation taken with permission fromCanadian authorities, including: � HerMajesty the Queen in Right of Canada,� Queen’s Printer for Ontario,� Canada Post Corporation,GeoBase.

NAVTEQ holds a non−exclusive li-cense from the United States PostalService to publish and sell ZIP+4information.

�United States Postal Service2007.Prices are not established, controlledor approved by the United States Post-al Service. The following trademarksand registrations are owned by theUSPS: United States Postal Service,USPS, and ZIP+4.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Personal Use Only. You agree to usethis Data together with vehicle naviga-tion system for the solely personal,non−commercial purposes for whichyou were licensed, and not for servicebureau, time−sharing or other similarpurposes. Accordingly, but subject tothe restrictions set forth in the followingparagraphs, you may copy this Dataonly as necessary for your personaluse to (i) view it, and (ii) save it, pro-vided that you do not remove any copy-right notices that appear and do notmodify the Data in any way. You agreenot to otherwise reproduce, copy,modify, decompile, disassemble or re-verse engineer any portion of thisData, and may not transfer or distributeit in any form, for any purpose, exceptto the extent permitted by mandatorylaws. Multi−disc sets may only betransferred or sold as a complete setas provided by DENSO and not as asubset thereof.

APPENDIX

400

Restrictions. Except where you havebeen specifically licensed to do so byDENSO, and without limiting the pre-ceding paragraph, you may not (a) usethis Data with any products, systems,or applications installed or otherwiseconnected to or in communication withvehicles, capable of vehicle naviga-tion, positioning, dispatch, real timeroute guidance, fleet management orsimilar applications; or (b) with or incommunication with any positioningdevices or any mobile or wireless−con-nected electronic or computer devices,including without limitation cellularphones, palmtop and handheld com-puters, pagers, and personal digital as-sistants or PDAs.

Warning. The Data may contain inac-curate or incomplete information dueto the passage of time, changing cir-cumstances, sources used and the na-ture of collecting comprehensive geo-graphic data, any of which may lead toincorrect results.

No Warranty. This Data is provided toyou “as is,” and you agree to use it atyour own risk. DENSO and its licen-sors (and their licensors and suppliers)make no guarantees, representationsor warranties of any kind, express orimplied, arising by law or otherwise, in-cluding but not limited to, content, qual-ity, accuracy, completeness, effective-ness, reliability, fitness for a particularpurpose, usefulness, use or results tobe obtained from this Data, or that theData or server will be uninterrupted orerror−free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: DENSO ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OFQUALITY, PERFORMANCE,MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ORNON−INFRINGEMENT. SomeStates, Territories and Countries donot allow certain warranty exclusions,so to that extent the above exclusionmay not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO ANDITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIRLICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: INRESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMANDOR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OFTHE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OFTHE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTIONALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THEUSE OR POSSESSION OF THEINFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSSOF PROFIT, REVENUE,CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, ORANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THISINFORMATION, ANY DEFECT INTHE INFORMATION, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORTOR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVENIF DENSO OR ITS LICENSORSHAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.Some States, Territories and Countriesdo not allow certain liability exclusionsor damages limitations, so to thatextent the above may not apply to you.

APPENDIX

401

Export Control. You agree not to ex-port from anywhere any part of theData provided to you or any directproduct thereof except in compliancewith, and with all licenses and approv-als required under, applicable exportlaws, rules and regulations.

Entire Agreement. These terms andconditions constitute the entire agree-ment between DENSO (and its licen-sors, including their licensors and sup-pliers) and you pertaining to the sub-ject matter hereof, and supersedes intheir entirety any and all written or oralagreements previously existing be-tween us with respect to such subjectmatter.

Governing Law. The above terms andconditions shall be governed by thelaws of the State of Illinois, withoutgiving effect to (i) its conflict of lawsprovisions, or (ii) the United NationsConvention for Contracts for theInternational Sale of Goods, which isexplicitly excluded. You agree tosubmit to the jurisdiction of the State ofIllinois for any and all disputes, claimsand actions arising from or inconnection with the Data provided toyou hereunder.

Government End Users. If the Data isbeing acquired by or on behalf of theUnited States government or any otherentity seeking or applying rights similarto those customarily claimed by theUnited States government, this Data isa “commercial item” as that term is de-fined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is li-censed in accordance with these End−User Terms, and each copy of Data de-livered or otherwise furnished shall bemarked and embedded as appropriatewith the following “Notice of Use”, andshall be treated in accordance withsuch Notice:

NOTICE OF USECONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/

SUPPLIER) NAME: NAVTEQ

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS:

425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606

This Data is a commercial item asdefined in FAR 2.101 and is subject

to these End−User Terms underwhich this Data was provided.

©2007 NAVTEQ − All rights reserved.

If the Contracting Officer, federal gov-ernment agency, or any federal officialrefuses to use the legend providedherein, the Contracting Officer, federalgovernment agency,or any federal offi-cial must notify NAVTEQ prior to seek-ing additional or alternative rights in theData.

APPENDIX

402

END USER NOTICE

PLEASE READ THIS NOTICECAREFULLY BEFORE USING THISNAVIGATION SYSTEM

The Point Of Interest Data (“POI”Data) in the navigation system is inpart provided by infoUSA Inc.(“infoUSA”). By using the POI Data,you accept and agree to all termsand conditions set forth below.

1. Ownership

All rights, title and interest to theinfoUSA POI Data shall be retained byinfoUSA.

2. Limitations on use

Except to the extent explicitly per-mitted by mandatory laws, you may notextract or re−utilize any portion of thecontents of the POI Data, nor repro-duce, copy, modify, adapt, translate,disassemble, decompile, or reverseengineer any portion of the POI Data.

3. Transfer

You may not transfer the POI Data tothird parties, except together with thesystem for which it was created, pro-vided that you do not retain any copy ofthe POI Data.

4. Disclaimer of warranty

EXCEPT AS STATED HEREIN,INFOUSA MAKES NO EXPRESS ORIMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIEDWARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ORWARRANTY OFMERCHANTABILITY.

5. Limitation of liability

EITHER INFOUSA OR SUPPLIER OFPOI DATA SHALL NOT BE LIABLEFOR ANY INDIRECT,CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES MADE OR ALLEGED INCONNECTION WITH YOUR USE OFTHE POI DATA.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTPersonal Use Only. You agree to usethis information for solely personal,non−commercial purposes, and not forservice bureau, time−sharing or othersimilar purposes. You may not modifythe information or remove any copy-right notices that appear on the infor-mation in any way. You may not de-compile, disassemble or reverse engi-neer any portion of this information,and may not transfer or distribute it inany form, for any purpose. Without lim-iting the foregoing, you may not usethis information with any products, sys-tems, or applications installed or other-wise connected to or in communicationwith vehicles, capable of vehicle navi-gation, positioning, dispatch, real timeroute guidance, fleet management orsimilar applications.

No Warranty. This information is pro-vided to you “as is,” and you agree touse it at your own risk. DENSO and itslicensors (and their licensors and sup-pliers, collectively “DENSO”) make noguarantees, representations or war-ranties of any kind, express or implied,arising by law or otherwise, includingbut not limited to, and DENSO ex-pressly disclaims any warranties re-garding content, quality, accuracy,completeness, effectiveness, reliabil-ity, fitness for a particular purpose,non−infringement, usefulness, use orresults to be obtained from this infor-mation, or that the information or serv-er will be uninterrupted or error−free.Some states, territories and countriesdo not allow certain warranty exclu-sions, so to that extent, the above ex-clusion may not apply to you.

APPENDIX

403

Disclaimer of Liability: DENSOSHALLNOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANYCLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,IRRESPECTIVE OF ITS NATURE,ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY ORDAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIALOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,INCLUDING ANY LOSS OF PROFIT,REVENUE OR CONTRACTSARISING OUT OF YOURPOSSESSION, USE OF ORINABILITY TO USE THISINFORMATION, ANY DEFECT INTHE INFORMATION, OR THEBREACH OF THESE TERMS ORCONDITIONS, WHETHER IN ANACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORTOR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVENIF DENSO OR ITS LICENSORSHAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.Some states, territories and countriesdo not allow certain liability exclusionsor damages limitations, so to thatextent the above may not apply to you.

Indemnity. You agree to indemnify,defend and hold DENSO and itslicensors (including their respectivelicensors, suppliers, assignees,subsidiaries, affiliated companies, andthe respective officers, directors,employees, shareholders, agents andrepresentatives of each of them) freeand harmless from and against anyliability, loss, injury (including injuriesresulting in death), demand, action,cost, expense, or claim of any kind orcharacter, including but not limited toattorney’s fees, arising out of or inconnection with any use or possessionby you of this information.

END USER NOTICEThe marks of companies displayed bythis product to indicate business loca-tions are the marks of their respectiveowners. The use of such marks in thisproduct does not imply any sponsor-ship, approval, or endorsement bysuch companies of this product.

There are two types of areas availablefor route guidance. In one type of area,primarily around metropolitan centers,detailed route guidance is available forthe entire area. In the other type of area,all roads are displayed on the map butroute guidance is limited. The naviga-tion route might lack precision becausethe data (no right turns, one−way traf-fic, etc.) is not complete. It is still pos-sible to reach the destination by follow-ing the arrow direction and distance asshown on the bottom left of the screen.The arrow points in the direction of thedestination. The distance shown is asmeasured in a straight line from the cur-rent vehicle position to the destinationarea.In order to provide you with as accuratemap information as possible, we are al-ways gathering information such as onroad repairs and carrying out on−site in-vestigations. However, the names ofroads, streets, facilities, and their locationsfrequently change. In some places,construction on roads may be in progress.For that reason, information on someareas in this system might be different fromthe actual location.

The map database is normally updatedonce a year. Contact your Lexus dealer forinformation about the availability and pric-ing of an update.

APPENDIX

404

� To confirm the database versionand map coverage area


2. Select “Map Data”.

Make sure the version of the database onthis screen.

To display the disc coverage area, select“Map Data Coverage”. Confirm the cov-ered area on the screen.

Contact your Lexus dealer to find out ifthere is a more recent update released.

APPENDIX

405

INDEXIndex

APPENDIX

406

For navigation system function, please also refer to the “Navigation systemfunction index” on page 22.

INDEX

407

Numbers/Symbols�·�button 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ? button 25,38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 routes selection 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AA/C button 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/V input adapter 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the side monitor 301. . . . . . . . . . Adding destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address book button 25,80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address book entries 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address book entry information 42. . . . . . . Address button 25,69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the air conditioning system

settings manually 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the air outlets 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning controls 278. . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow control buttons 278,282. . . . . . . . . . Air intake control button 278,281,283. . . . . . Air outlets 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alphabet key 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM·FM button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle mark 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Areas to avoid 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrow screen 44,94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASL 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio button 24,27,164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio language 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio settings 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/video remote controls 242. . . . . . . . . Auto avoid traffic 112,331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTO button 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto start 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic air conditioning system 280. . . . Automatic sound levelizer 172. . . . . . . . . . . AUX adapter 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUX·USB button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BBASS 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before using the rear seat

entertainment system controller 246. . . . Bluetooth� 136,337,368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth� audio operation 226. . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth� connection status 372,374. . . . . Brightness 36,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building information 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCalendar 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calendar button 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call by call history 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call by dial 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call by phonebook 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call by POI 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call by speed dial 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call by voice recognition 149,154. . . . . . . . . Call on the Bluetooth� phone 145. . . . . . . . Categories 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAUTION screen 30,248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD changer operation 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cellular phone 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH·DISC button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change icon 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change location 127,132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change name 126,131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change phone # 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Change size 132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing a portable player name 377. . . . . Changing the angle 215,260. . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the audio format 215,259. . . . . . . Changing the audio language 214,259. . . . . Changing the Bluetooth� audio

passcode 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Bluetooth� audio

player name 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Bluetooth� settings 369. . . . . Changing the page 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the pointer size 321. . . . . . . . . . . Changing the rear seat audio

source 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the speaker output 249. . . . . . . . Changing the subtitle

language 214,258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel category 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . City to search 69,74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate button 24,278,279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock button 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock settings 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color 36,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command list 54,56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass mode screen 44,46. . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting a Bluetooth� phone 142. . . . . . Connecting a USB memory player or

iPod� player 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Bluetooth� audio 380. . . . . . . . Connecting Bluetooth� audio

player 229. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX

408

Consumption 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contrast 36,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinates button 25,85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current position calibration 334. . . . . . . . . . Current position display 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor position as a destination 39. . . . . . . Cursor position as an address book

entry 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DDealer setting 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defogging the windshield 284. . . . . . . . . . . . Delete destination button 25,85. . . . . . . . . . . Delete personal data 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deletes previous destinations 116. . . . . . . . . Deleting a Bluetooth� phone 345. . . . . . . . . Deleting address book entries 128. . . . . . . Deleting areas to avoid 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting call history 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting destinations 85,99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting home 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting preset destinations 122. . . . . . . . . Deleting previous destinations 133. . . . . . . Deleting the phonebook data 354. . . . . . . . Deleting the speed dial 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the voice tag 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination button 24,66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination information 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination screen 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by

“Address Book” 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Address” 69. . . . . . Destination search by

“Coordinates” 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by

“Emergency” 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by

“Intersection & Freeway” 81. . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Map” 84. . . . . . . . . . Destination search by

“Point of Interest” 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by

“Previous Destinations” 79. . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by home 68. . . . . . . . . . Destination search by

preset destinations 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed navigation settings 116,328. . . . . . Detection level of the intuitive

parking assist−sensors 310. . . . . . . . . . .

Detection range of the intuitive parking assist−sensors 311. . . . . . . . . . . .

Detour setting 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialing by name 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISC button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disc slot 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DISP button 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display POI icons 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying portable player

information 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying the title and name 183. . . . . . . . Distance and time to destination 12,97. . . . Driving speeds 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DSP control 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual button 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual map screen 44,46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD audio controls 211,254. . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD audio discs 206,251,253. . . . . . . . . . . . DVD audio settings 209,256. . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD changer operation 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD language 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD player and DVD video disc

information 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD setup menu 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD video controls 210,254. . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD video discs 206,224,225,251,253. . . . DVD video settings 209,255. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EEdit “Dealer” or “Contact” name 386. . . . . . Edit “Location” 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit “Phone #” 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit route 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing address book entries 124. . . . . . . . . Editing area to avoid 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing home 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing preset destinations 121. . . . . . . . . . Editing the Bluetooth� phone 344. . . . . . . . Editing the phonebook data 352. . . . . . . . . . Editing the speed dial 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the voice tag 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eject button 164,188,203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ejecting discs 188,203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency button 25,80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter a Bluetooth� phone 140. . . . . . . . . . . ENTER button 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated arrival time 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Estimated travel time 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX

409

FFan speed 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan speed control buttons 278,281. . . . . . . . Foot print map 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot print map button 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freeway exit information screen 92. . . . . . . Freeway screen 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel consumption 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel consumption button 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . Function menu display screen 164. . . . . . . Function menu tab 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GGeneral button 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General settings 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Go home button 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS information 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS mark 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidance screen for the freeway 93. . . . . . Guidance screen on the freeway 44. . . . . . Guiding the route 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HHands−free system 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heading−up 12,48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Headphone jacks 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HFP (Hands Free Profile) 136. . . . . . . . . . . Home 14,20,68,117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IIf the changer malfunctions 200,223. . . . . . . Incoming call display 372,373. . . . . . . . . . . . Information about the icon 41. . . . . . . . . . . . Information screen 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information/Phone button 24. . . . . . . . . . . . Initial screen 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing the Bluetooth� audio

settings 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing the Bluetooth� settings 371. . . . Initializing the detailed phone

settings 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing the phone volume

settings 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputting letters and numbers 33. . . . . . . . . Inserting discs 186,201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupt call 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersection & freeway button 25,81. . . . . . .

Intersection guidance screen 44,93. . . . . . . Intuitive parking assist 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intuitive parking assist−sensor

detection information 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intuitive parking assist−sensor

failure warning 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iPod� player operation 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LLanguage code 217,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Last 5 cities 71,77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitations of the navigation

system 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List all categories button 75,78. . . . . . . . . . . List screen operation 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening to satellite radio 181. . . . . . . . . . . Listening to the radio 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOAD button 164,186,201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local POI list 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MMaintenance 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance information 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance information items 384. . . . . . . Maintenance information setting 384. . . . . . Manage phone 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual clock setting 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map button 25,84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map coverage area 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map data button 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map database information 394. . . . . . . . . . . Map database updates 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . Map database version 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map icons 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map scale 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map screen 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map screen operation 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAP/VOICE button 10,38,39. . . . . . . . . . . . Mark button 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks shown on DVD video discs 224. . . . Memory point names 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MENU button 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message button 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microphone 49,136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MID 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MODE button 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP3 195,252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi−information display 309. . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX

410

NNames of areas to be avoided 131. . . . . . . Natural speech information 52. . . . . . . . . . . Navigation button 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation settings 116,327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . North−up 12,48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number key 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OOff function 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating a DVD disc 206,251. . . . . . . . . . . OPP (Object Push Profile) 136. . . . . . . . . . Orientation of the map 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside air mode 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirror

defogging 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside temperature display 278. . . . . . . . .

PPAL format 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parental lock 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Past record 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pause guidance 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phone button 27,28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phonebook 146,347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing a Bluetooth� audio 231. . . . . . . . . . Playing a disc 190,205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing a DVD disc 208,252. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing a MP3/WMA disc 195,252. . . . . . . . Playing a USB memory player or

iPod� player 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing a video CD 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing an audio disc 191,251. . . . . . . . . . . . POI as a destination 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POI category change 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POI icons hidden 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POI information 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point of interest button 25,73. . . . . . . . . . . . . POIs near the search point 78. . . . . . . . . . . POIs to be displayed 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pop−up information 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable audio

players 175,226,234,375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset destination buttons 25. . . . . . . . . . . . Preset destinations 16,68,120. . . . . . . . . . . . Presetting a channel 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presetting a station 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Previous destinations button 25,79. . . . . . . . PWR·VOL knob 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RRadio data system 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio ID 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio operation 175,180,250. . . . . . . . . . . . RAND button 194,199,233,241. . . . . . . . . . . RDS 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system

controller 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system

displays 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system

features 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear system lock 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system 290. . . . . . . . . . . Rear view monitor system camera 292. . . . Rear window defogger button 278. . . . . . . . Rear window defogging 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive on the Bluetooth� phone 152. . . . . Recirculated air mode 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconnecting Bluetooth� audio

player 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reconnecting the Bluetooth�

phone 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Region codes 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering a Bluetooth�

phone 339,346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering address book entries 123. . . . . Registering areas to avoid 129. . . . . . . . . . . Registering home 14,117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering portable player 378. . . . . . . . . . Registering preset destinations 16,120. . . . Registering the phonebook data 350. . . . . . Registering the speed dial 357. . . . . . . . . . . Registering the voice tag 365. . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Touch 10,31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Touch knob 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing a Bluetooth� audio 379. . . . . . . . Reordering destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the rear seat entertainment

system controller batteries 246. . . . . . . . Resume guidance 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ring volume 337,338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route features 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route guidance screen 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route overview 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route preference 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route preview 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route trace 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route trace−start 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route trace−stop 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route type 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPT button 194,199,233,241. . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX

411

SSAT button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Satellite tuner 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale indicator 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCAN button 164,193,198,240,241. . . . . . . Screen adjustment 36,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen configuration button 12. . . . . . . . . . Screen layout function 333. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen off 36,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen scroll operation 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen size 173,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screens for clock settings 323. . . . . . . . . . . Screens for general settings 316. . . . . . . . . Screens for navigation settings 329. . . . . . Screens for voice settings 325. . . . . . . . . . . Search area 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search by category 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search by freeway entrance/exit 83. . . . . . Search by intersection 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search by name 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search by phone # 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search point from along my route 76. . . . . Search point from

near a destination 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search point from near city center 76. . . . . Search point from near hear 76. . . . . . . . . . Searching by group 212,257. . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching by title 212,256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching by track 223,264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Searching for a desired file 198,240. . . . . . . Searching for a desired folder 198,241. . . . . Searching for a desired track or

disc 193. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEEK·TRACK button 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select button 195,196,237,238. . . . . . . . . . . Select portable player 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Bluetooth� phone 342,346. . . . . Selecting a desired album 232. . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a desired disc 191,206. . . . . . . . . . Selecting a desired file 196,252. . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a desired files or tracks 238. . . . Selecting a desired folder 195,237. . . . . . . . Selecting a desired track 192,232,251. . . . . Selecting a keyboard layout 318. . . . . . . . . Selecting a language 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a play mode 237. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a satellite radio channel 182. . . . Selecting a station 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting DVD disc menu item 211. . . . . . . . Selecting portable player connection

method 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the bonus group 213,257. . . . . . . . Selecting the menu number 258,260. . . . . . Selecting the pointer shape 320. . . . . . . . . . Selecting the search area 66. . . . . . . . . . . .

Sets address book 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets area to avoid 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets home 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets preset destinations 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting a feedback force 320. . . . . . . . . . . . Setting and deleting destinations 98. . . . . . Setting Bluetooth� audio 378. . . . . . . . . . . . Setting home as the destination 20. . . . . . . Setting route 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the intuitive parking assist

mode 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the phonebook 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the vehicle interior

temperature 280,282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the voice tag 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the address book 122. . . . . . . . . Setting up the areas to avoid 128. . . . . . . . Setting up the home 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the preset destinations 119. . . . . Setup button 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup operation from

the rear seat 220. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup screen 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show free flowing traffic 112,332. . . . . . . . . Show on map 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show on map button 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show XM� NavTraffic

information 112,113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show XM� NavWeather

information 158,159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side camera 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side monitor 296,302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side view monitor system

initialization screen 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single map screen 44,45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sort 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sound dynamic range 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . Sound icons 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speech command example 51,55. . . . . . . . . Speech command system 49. . . . . . . . . . . . Speed dial 147,356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed dials settings 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start screen 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting route from adjacent road 105. . . . . Starting route guidance 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering switches 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Street address 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subtitle language 216,262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surround function 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching between audio

functions 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the air intake control to

automatic mode 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the screens 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol key 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX

412

TTalk on the Bluetooth� phone 152. . . . . . . . Talk switch 49,149,154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone settings 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telephone switch 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TEMP button 278,280,282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature display 278,287. . . . . . . . . . . . . Time zone 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire change calibration 334,335. . . . . . . . . . . Title 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tone 36,268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tone and balance 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic announcement 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic button 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic voice guidance 112,326. . . . . . . . . . . Transferring a phone number 348. . . . . . . . TREB 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TUNE·FILE knob 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn list screen 44,94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the audio system

on and off 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of intuitive parking

assist−sensors 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TypeSeek button 177,182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical voice guidance prompts 95. . . . . . .

UUnit of measurement 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB memory player operation 234. . . . . . .

VVehicle button 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle customization 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle settings 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CD 220,265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CD controls 222,263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video CD settings 221,264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video mode 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewer restrictions 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice button 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice guidance speaker 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice settings 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice tag 150,364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice volume 326,337,338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WWeather information 158,161. . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather warnings 158,161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield air flow button 284. . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper de−icer 286. . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wiper de−icer button 278. . . . . . WMA 195,252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XXM� indicator 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XM� NavTraffic 112,158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XM� NavTraffic icon 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XM� NavTraffic indicator 113. . . . . . . . . . . . . XM� NavTraffic information arrow 113. . . . . XM� NavTraffic text information 44. . . . . . . XM� NavWeather button 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . XM� NavWeather indicator 162. . . . . . . . . . XM� Satellite Radio broadcast 180. . . . . . .

ZZoom in button 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom out button 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

Introduction

This manual explains the operation of the Navigation System.Please read this manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep thismanual in your vehicle at all times.

The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advancedvehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite sig-nals from the Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S.Department of Defense. Using these signals and other vehicle sen-sors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locatinga desired destination.

The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from yourpresent starting location to your destination. The system is also designedto direct you to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner.The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be theshortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowl-edge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.

The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories toallow you to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. Ifa destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address ora major intersection close to it and the system will guide you there.

The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The au-dio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction toturn in approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help youkeep your eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough time to allowyou to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.

2

Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems havecertain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly.The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on the satellite con-dition, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstan-ces. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer topages 393 through 394.

3

For safety reasons, this manual indicatesitems requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.

CAUTIONThis is a warning against anythingwhich may cause injury to people ifthe warning is ignored. You are in-formed about what you must or mustnot do in order to reduce the risk ofinjury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anythingwhich may cause damage to the ve-hicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed aboutwhat you must or must not do in or-der to avoid or reduce the risk of dam-age to your vehicle and its equip-ment.

INFORMATIONThis provides additional information.

To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shown be-low.

This system is intended to assist in reach-ing the destination and, if used properly,can do so. The driver is solely responsiblefor the safe operation of your vehicle andthe safety of your passengers.

Do not use any feature of this system to theextent it becomes a distraction and pre-vents safe driving. The first priority whiledriving should always be the safe opera-tion of the vehicle. While driving, be sureto observe all traffic regulations.

Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire Navigation Sys-tem Owner’s Manual to make sure you un-derstand the system. Do not allow otherpeople to use this system until they haveread and understood the instructions inthis manual.

For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavail-able screen buttons are dimmed. Onlywhen the vehicle is not moving, can thedestination and route selection be done.

Important information aboutthis manual Safety Instruction

4

CAUTION

� For safety, the driver should notoperate the navigation systemwhile he/she is driving.Insufficient attention to the roadand traffic may cause an accident.

� While driving, be sure to obey thetraffic regulations and maintainawareness of the road conditions.If a traffic sign on the road hasbeen changed, route guidancemay provide wrong informationsuch as the direction of a one waystreet.

While driving, listen to the voice instruc-tions as much as possible and glance atthe screen briefly and only when it is safe.However, do not totally rely on voice guid-ance. Use it just for reference. If the sys-tem cannot determine the current vehicleposition correctly, there is a possibility ofincorrect, late, or non−voice guidance.

The data in the system may occasionallybe incomplete. Road conditions, includingdriving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,before following any instruction from thesystem, look to see whether the instructioncan be done safely and legally.

This system cannot warn about suchthings as the safety of an area, condition ofstreets, and availability of emergency ser-vices. If unsure about the safety of anarea, do not drive into it. Under no cir-cumstances is this system a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgement.

Use this system only in locations where itis legal to do so. Some states/provincesmay have laws prohibiting the use of videoand navigation screens next to the driver.

5

Table of ContentsQuick guide —

— Remote Touch 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — Map screen 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — Registering home 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — Registering preset destinations 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — Operation flow: guiding the route 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . — Setting home as the destination 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation system function index 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick reference (“Start” screen) 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quick reference (“Destination” screen) 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick reference (“Setup” screen) 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick reference (“Information” screen) 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Navigation System: Basic Functions⟨Basic information before operation⟩Initial screen 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to use the Remote Touch 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inputting letters and numbers/List screen operation 33. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Screen adjustment 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Help icon 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Map screen operation 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current position display 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen scroll operation 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching the screens 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Map scale 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foot print map 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orientation of the map 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard map icons 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speech command system 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Natural speech information 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command list 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Guide

6

2 Navigation System: Destination SearchDestination search 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Selecting the search area 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by Home 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by Preset destinations 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Address” 69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Point of Interest” 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Previous Destinations” 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Address Book” 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Emergency” 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Intersection & Freeway” 81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Map” 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Destination search by “Coordinates” 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting set destinations 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting route guidance 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 Navigation System: Route GuidanceRoute guidance screen 92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Typical voice guidance prompts 95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Distance and time to destination 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting and deleting destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reordering destinations 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting destinations 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting route 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detour setting 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route overview 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route preference 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pausing and resuming guidance 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Show on map 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display POI∗ icons 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Route trace 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XM� NavTraffic 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

∗: Point of Interest

7

4 Navigation System: Memory PointsNavigation settings 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setting up the “Home” 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Preset Destinations” 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Address Book” 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up the “Areas to Avoid” 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting previous destinations 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 Telephone and InformationTelephone (Hands−free system for cellular phone) 136. . . . . . . . .

Enter a Bluetooth� phone 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call on the Bluetooth� phone 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive on the Bluetooth� phone 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk on the Bluetooth� phone 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel consumption 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Past record 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumption 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calendar 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XM� NavWeather 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 Audio/video SystemQuick reference 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio/video system 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Some basics 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio operation 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CD changer operation 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD changer operation 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth� audio operation 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB memory player/iPod� player operation 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio/video remote controls 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat entertainment system features 245. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the radio 251. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DVD player 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing an audio CD/CD text 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing WMA/MP3 discs 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing DVD video/audio 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the video mode 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing other settings 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio/video system operating hints 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

7 Air ConditioningAutomatic air conditioning controls 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8 Rear View Monitor SystemRear view monitor system 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9 Side MonitorSide monitor 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 Intuitive Parking AssistIntuitive parking assist 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 SetupGeneral settings 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Clock settings 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Voice settings 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Navigation settings 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Detailed navigation settings 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Telephone settings 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volume setting 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage phone 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phonebook 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the phonebook 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed dials setting 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting call history 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the voice tag 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bluetooth� 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio settings 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Select portable player 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings Bluetooth� audio 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle settings 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle customization 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LEXUS parking assist setting 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12 AppendixLimitations of the navigation system 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Map database information and updates 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10

U0026LC

Quick guide —— Remote Touch

11

No. Name Function Page

1 “MENU” button Push this button to display the “Start”(menu) screen. 24

2 “�·�” button Push this button to change the scale ofthe map and to scroll the list screen. 31, 35, 47

3“MAP/VOICE”button

Push this button to repeat a guidancevoice, cancel the map scroll, start guid-ance and display the current position.

38

4Remote Touchknob

Move this knob in the desired directionto select a function, letter and mapscreen button.

31

5 “ENTER” button Push this button to enter the selectedfunction, letter or map screen button. 31

6 “DISP” button Push this button to display the “Display”(quality control) screen. 36

12

U0025LCb


1North−up orheading−upsymbol

This symbol indicates a map view withnorth−up or heading−up. Selecting thissymbol changes the map orientation.

48

2 Scale indicator This figure indicates the map scale. 47

3 Zoom out button Select this button to reduce the mapscale. 47

4 “��Off”

Select this button to obtain a broaderview. Some of the buttons on the screenare not displayed. They are displayedagain by selecting “On��”.

334

5 “Mark”Select this button to register the currentposition or the cursor position as an ad-dress book entry.

40

6 “Route” Select this button to change the route. 98, 100

— Map screen

13


7 “Show on Map”

Select this button to browse informationabout guidance route, to set the Pointsof Interest to be displayed on thescreen, or to record the route.

106, 112

8 Zoom in button Select this button to magnify the mapscale. 47

9Foot print mapbutton

Select this button to display the foot printmap and the building information. 47

10Screenconfigurationbutton

Select this button to change the screenmode. 44

11Distance and timeto destination

Displays the distance, the estimatedtravel time to the destination, and theestimated arrival time at the destination.

97

12 XM� indicator This mark is displayed when XM� infor-mation is received. 112

13

“GPS” mark(GlobalPositioningSystem)

Whenever the vehicle is receiving sig-nals from the GPS, this mark is dis-played.

393

14

U0030LC

U0021LC

U0002LC

U0003LC

1 Push the “MENU” button.

2 Select “Destination” and pushthe “ENTER” button.

3 Select “Go Home” and push the“ENTER” button.

If home has not been registered, you canregister it by selecting “Go Home”.

4 Select “Yes” and push the “EN-TER” button.

— Registering home

15

U0004LC

U0005LC

U0006LC

5 There are 4 different methods tosearch your home.

See “Destination search” on page 66.

6 Select “Enter” and push the “EN-TER” button.

The “Edit Home” screen is displayed.

7 Select “OK” and push the “EN-TER” button.

Registration of home is complete.

You can also register home by selecting“Setup”. (See “ (a) Registering home” onpage 117.)

You can change the name, location, phonenumber and icon. (See “ (b) Editing home”on page 118.)

16

U0030LC

U0021LC

U0007LC

U0008LC



3 Select one of the preset destina-tion buttons and push the “EN-TER” button.

You can set a preset destination to any pre-set destination button that has not yet beenset.

4 Select “Yes” and push the “EN-TER” button.

— Registering preset destinations

17

U0009LC

U0010LC

U0011LC

5 There are 4 different methods tosearch preset destinations.


6 Select “Enter” and push the “EN-TER” button.

The “Edit Preset Destination” screen is dis-played.

7 Select “OK” and push the “EN-TER” button.

Registration of preset destinations is com-plete.

You can also register preset destinationsby selecting “Setup”.(See “ (a) Registering preset destinations”on page 120.)

You can change the name, location, phonenumber and icon. (See “ (b) Editing presetdestinations” on page 121.)

The registered points can be used on the“Destination” screen. (See “ — Destinationsearch by Preset destinations” on page68.)

18

U0030LC

U0021LC

U0012LC

U0013LC



3 There are 10 different methods tosearch destinations.


4 Select “Go to ” and push the“ENTER” button.

The navigation system performs a searchfor the route.

— Operation flow: guiding the route

19

U0014LC

5 Select “OK” and push the “EN-TER” button, and start driving.

Routes other than the one recommendedcan also be selected. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

6 Guidance to the destination isgiven via voice and on the guid-ance screen.

20

U0030LC

U0021LC

U0002LC

U0016LCa



3 Select “Go Home” and push the“ENTER” button.

“Go Home” can be used if your home hasbeen registered. (To register “Home”, see“ (a) Registering home” on page 117.)

4 Select “Go to ” and push the“ENTER” button.

The navigation system performs a searchfor the route.

— Setting home as the destination

21

U0017LCa

5 Select “OK” and push the “EN-TER” button, and start driving.

Routes other than the one recommendedcan also be selected. (See “Starting routeguidance” on page 86.)

6 Guidance to the destination isgiven via voice and on the guid-ance screen.

22

�Map�Displaying maps Page

Viewing the map screen 12

Displaying the current vehicle position 38

Viewing the current position vicinity map 39

Changing the scale 47

Changing the map orientation 48

Displaying Point of Interest 106

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 97

Selecting the dual map screen 44

Viewing foot print map 47

Deleting map screen buttons 334

Searching destination Page

Searching the destination (by home, Point of Interest, phone #, etc.)

66

Changing the selected search area 66

Operating the map location of the selected destination 86

�Route guidance�Before starting route guidance Page

Setting the destination 86

Viewing alternative routes 86

Starting route guidance 86

Before starting or during route guidance Page

Viewing the route 86

Adding destinations 98

Changing the route 100

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination 97

Navigation system function index

23

During route guidance Page

Pausing route guidance 105

Adjusting route guidance volume 327

Deleting the destination 85, 99

Displaying the entire route map 101

�Useful functions�Address book Page

Registering your own address book entries 122

Marking icons on the map 124

Information Page

Displaying vehicle maintenance 384

Displaying the calendar 157

Hands−free system (for cellular phone) Page

Initiating Bluetooth� 140

Making a call on the Bluetooth� phone 145

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth� phone 152

Speech command system Page

Operating the system with your voice 49

24

To display the “Start” screen, push the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

U0031LC

1 “Destination”You can use one of 10 different methods tosearch your destination. 25, 65. . . . . . . .

2 “Info./Phone”Select this button to operate the hands−free system and display fuel economy in-formation, etc. 28, 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 “Setup”Select this button to adjust settings of thenavigation, audio and hands−free sys-tems, etc. 27, 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 “Climate”Select this button to operate the air condi-tioning system. 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 “Audio”Select this button to operate the audio sys-tem. 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick reference (“Start” screen)

25

The “Destination” screen allows you to search for a destination. To display the “Destina-tion” screen, push the “MENU” button and select “Destination”.

U0020LC

1 “Address”A house number and the street addresscan be input by using the input keys.

69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 “Point of Interest”

Select one of the many Points of Interestthat have already been stored in the sys-tem’s database. 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 “Previous Destinations”

A destination can be selected from any ofthe last 100 previously set destinationsand from the previous starting point.

79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 “Del. Dest.”

Set destinations can be deleted. 85. . . .

5 “?”Function help for the “Destination” screencan be viewed on this screen. 38. . . . . . 6 “Address Book”

The desired location can be selected froma registered entry in the “Address book”.(To register address book entries, see “(a)Registering address book entries” on page123.)

80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 “Emergency”

One of the four categories of emergencyservice points that are already stored in thesystem’s database can be selected.

80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick reference (“Destination” screen)

26

8 “Intersection & Freeway”The names of two intersecting streets or afreeway (interstate) entrance or exit can beentered. This is helpful if only the generalvicinity, not the specific address, is known.

81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 “Map”

A destination can be selected simply byselecting the location on the displayedmap. 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 “Coordinates”A destination can be set using latitudesand longitudes as coordinates. 85. . . . . 11 Preset destination buttonsOne of 5 preset destination points can beselected by selecting the screen directly.If a preset destination point has not beenregistered, a message will be displayedand the setting screen will automaticallyappear. To use this function, it is neces-sary to set the “preset destination”. (Toregister a “Preset Destination”, see “(a)Registering preset destinations” on page120.) 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 “Go Home”A personal home address can be selectedwithout entering the address each time. If“Home” has not been registered, a mes-sage will be displayed and the settingscreen will automatically appear. To usethis function, it is necessary to set a“Home” address. (To register “Home”, see“(a) Registering home” on page 117.)

68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27

The items shown on the “Setup” screen can be set. To display the “Setup” screen, pushthe “MENU” button and select “Setup”.

U0019LCa

1 “General”Settings are available for language selec-tion, operation sounds, automatic screenchange, etc. 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 “Clock”Used for changing settings for time zones,daylight saving time, etc. 323. . . . . . . . . .

3 “Voice”Voice guidance can be set. 325. . . . . . .

4 “Navi.”Settings are available for average cruisingspeed, displayed screen contents, POIicon categories, etc. 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 “Vehicle”Settings are available for vehicle informa-tion such as maintenance information.

384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 “Audio”Settings are available for portable audiodevices, Bluetooth� audio devices etc.

376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 “Phone”Bluetooth� phones and phone numberscan be registered, and the receiver volumecan be adjusted. 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick reference (“Setup” screen)

28

This screen can be used to display the calendar and information on operation of thehands−free phone, etc. To display the “Information” screen, push the “MENU” buttonand select “Info./Phone”.

1 “Phone”To view hands free phone information.

140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 “Fuel Consumption”

Fuel consumption is displayed. 155. . . . 3 “Map Data”

Displays information regarding the mapdata disc version or coverage area.

404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 “Calendar”To view calendar. 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 “XM NavWeather”

To display the XM� NavWeather screen.158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick reference (“Information” screen)

navigation system: basic functions section 1 · navigation system: basic functions 30 when the...

Documents